Zhone Technologies Server IMACS 200 User Manual

IMACS-200  
System Reference Guide  
October 2007  
Document Part Number: 830-01760-01 Revision A2  
Release 2.0.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product Description  
1
2
Product Description  
Release 2.0.2 is the fifth software release for the IMACS-200 platform. The IMACS-200  
offers a sub-set of the traditional IMACS interfaces optimized for use in smaller locations. It  
also is designed to operate over an extended temperature range such that it can be installed in  
locations that do not provide a controlled environment. The same "look and feel" of the  
IMACS has been maintained for this new product offering so that those familiar with the  
IMACS product line will quickly be able to configure and successfully deploy the  
IMACS-200. Highlights of this new product offering are outlined below.  
Features Delivered in Previous Releases  
1.0.0  
Data capability: Four LD-SRU ports.  
Voice ports: Four 2-wire E&M transmit only (TO) and four FXS ports.  
Ethernet and RS-232 craft ports  
WAN capability for Four T1 interfaces.  
Two V.35 interfaces.  
Four alarm outputs and four external telemetry inputs.  
Two Optical HSU ports capability is offered as an option conforming to IEEE 37.94  
Standard.  
Redundant power supplies of -48VDC, 120VAC or 220VAC are offered as an option.  
1.0.1  
Support for E&M Type I and Type II signaling.  
E&M test screen.  
IP Daisy-chaining.  
HSU loop-back capability.  
WAN to WAN trunk signaling to support two IMACS-200’s worth of DS0’s.  
1.0.2  
Security enhancement with the introduction of a login log event.  
Fast Circuit Restore  
Allow spaces in the Node ID field  
Main screen notification of individual port states.  
Selection of DXS and CSU WAN functions.  
Product Description  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Features introduced in this Release (2.0.0)  
o.  
Allow FXS gain to be as high as +6.5 dB.  
1.0.3  
E&M signalling support for Type IV and Type V.  
SNMP support for Online (must use version 2.0.0 of Online Software).  
Support for E1 signaling on the WAN facilities  
Introduction of the SA4 management channel bit for E1 customers.  
IPR (IP Routing) capabilities.  
Remote upgrade from EMS (requires use of 2.0.0 Online Software)  
3
4
Features introduced in this Release (2.0.0)  
Optical WAN daughter card as an option.  
125 VDC version of the product.  
Notable System Improvements  
In addition to the feature content described above, some other system improvements have  
been introduced. They include, but are not limited to, the following:  
None.  
5
IMACS-200 Initialization and Control  
The IMACS-200 initializes and controls the system on power up. It performs the following  
functions:  
Initializes the system upon power-up, and runs a self-test on all ports.  
Polls all ports in the system to determine their operating status.  
Processes all incoming operator commands and displays the responses in a series of  
operator interface screens for each port in the system. The operator interface system  
(local VT-100 terminal, remote computer, or network management system) connects to  
the Serial Interface port, which sends these commands for processing.  
Includes circuitry that allows you to cross-connect DS0 time slots between T1 lines  
connected to system WAN ports. Refer to the DS0 time slot assignment operations.  
Includes a test pattern generator for T1 line test purposes.  
ii  
Product Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Reference Guide  
Enables Ethernet connection for remote management, configuration and downloading of  
host code via a 10baseT Ethernet port. To setup the Ethernet port, see “Setting Up Remote  
Connectivity” on page 21 of Chapter 4, General Features. To download and activate new  
Chapter 4, General Features.  
6
System Reference Guide  
This System Reference Guide assists technicians in unpacking, assembling, installing,  
configuring, and operating the integrated access device.  
Chapter 1. System Overview  
Chapter 2. System Installation  
Chapter 3. System Configuration and Operation  
Chapter 4. General Features  
Chapter 5. WAN Ports  
Chapter 6. FXS Ports  
Chapter 7. E&M Ports  
Chapter 8. Sub Rate Data Ports (SRU)  
Chapter 9. High Speed Data Ports (HSU)  
Chapter 10. Optical High Speed Data Ports (OHSU)  
Chapter 11. Alarms  
Chapter 12. IP Routing  
Chapter 13. Optical WAN board (OWAN).  
Chapter 14. System Testing and Diagnostics  
Appendix A. System Specifications  
Appendix B. Error Messages  
Glossary  
Product Description  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Technical support  
o.  
7
Technical support  
If you require assistance with the installation or operation of your product, or if you  
want to return a product for repair under warranty, contact Zhone customer service.  
The contact information is as follows:  
E-mail  
877-ZHONE20  
Telephone (North America)  
Telephone (International)  
Internet  
510-777-7133  
www.zhone.com/support  
If you purchased the product from an authorized dealer, distributor, Value Added  
Reseller (VAR), or third party, contact that supplier for technical assistance and  
warranty support.  
8
9
Service Requirements  
If the product malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by the manufacturer or a  
Zhone-authorized agent. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the  
need for service to Zhone customer service.  
Safety Information and Precautions  
The equipment is designed and manufactured in compliance with the European Safety  
Standard EN60950 and the Unites States UL60950 Safety Standards. However, the following  
precautions should be observed to ensure personal safety during installation or service, and  
prevent damage to the equipment or equipment to be connected.  
Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in this  
Reference Guide.  
Only qualified technicians should perform these tasks.  
1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.  
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed  
for wet locations.  
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has  
been disconnected at the network interface.  
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.  
5. See the UL Statement for Voice ports.  
iv  
Product Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Information and Precautions  
6. Never attempt to open the case.  
7. The AC versions of this product is intended to be used with a three-wire grounding type  
plug - a plug which has a grounding pin. This is a safety feature. Equipment grounding  
is vital to ensure safe operation. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug  
by modifying the plug or using an adapter.  
Prior to installation, use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the AC receptacle for  
the presence of earth ground. If the receptacle is not properly grounded, the installation  
must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem. If a three-wire  
grounding type power source is not available, consult a qualified electrician to  
determine another method of grounding the equipment.  
The DC versions of this product must be connected properly with the -VDC and return  
(RTN) leads. The grounding screw provided on the right rear of the chassis should be  
connected to frame ground.  
8. Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable  
operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these slots and openings  
must not be blocked or covered.  
9. DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where  
persons could step on or walk on the power cord.  
10. DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself. Refer all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
11. Special cables, which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the  
installation site, are the responsibility of the customer.  
12. When installed in the final configuration, the product must comply with the applicable  
Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed.  
If necessary, consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection  
authorities to ensure compliance.  
13. A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two  
or more buildings. If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected, the  
voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition. Consult a qualified electrical  
consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary,  
implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products.  
Product Description  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disclaimer for Shielded Cables  
o.  
WARNING!  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
"A" Digital Device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when  
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with this Reference Guide, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a  
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user  
will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.  
The authority to operate this equipment is conditioned by the requirement  
that no modifications will be made to the equipment unless the changes or  
modifications are expressly approved by the manufacturer.  
10  
Disclaimer for Shielded Cables  
This equipment was tested with shielded input/output and interface cables. It is recommended  
that shielded cables be used to reduce interference whenever interference is suspected.  
11  
12  
Panel and Cover Removal  
Only qualified Zhone service technicians should attempt the removal of the cover.  
Power Source  
Please refer to Appendix A, System Specifications in the later in this guide regarding System  
Requirements.  
13  
Ordering Guide  
Model Number  
IMACS-200-48VDC  
Description  
IMACS 200 System with single -48 VDC Power Supply  
IMACS 200 System with two -48 VDC Power Supplies  
IMACS-200-RDNT-48VDC  
IMACS 200 System with single -48 VDC Power Supply and a 2-port  
OHSU daughter card.  
IMACS-200-48VDC-OHSU  
vi  
Product Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Ordering Guide  
Model Number  
Description  
IMACS 200 System with two -48 VDC Power Supplies and a 2-port  
OHSU daughter card  
IMACS-200-RDNT-48VDC-OHSU  
IMACS 200 System with single -48 VDC Power Supply and an Optical  
WAN daughter board.  
IMACS-200-48VDC-OW  
IMACS-200-RDNT-48VDC-OW  
IMACS-200-48VDC-OHSU-OW  
IMACS-200-RDNT-48VDC-OHSU-OW  
IMACS 200 System with two -48 VDC Power Supplies and an Optical  
WAN daughter board.  
IMACS 200 System with single -48 VDC Power Supply, a 2-port OHSU  
daughter card and an Optical WAN daughter board.  
IMACS 200 System with two -48 VDC Power Supplies, a 2-port OHSU  
daughter card and an Optical WAN daughter board.  
IMACS-200-AC  
IMACS 200 System with single 120/220 VAC Power Supply  
IMACS 200 System with two 120/220 VAC Power Supplies  
IMACS-200-RDNT-AC  
IMACS 200 System with single 120/220 VAC Power Supply and a 2-port  
OHSU daughter card  
IMACS-200-AC-OHSU  
IMACS 200 System with two 120/220 VAC Power Supplies and a 2-port  
OHSU daughter card  
IMACS-200-RDNT-AC-OHSU  
IMACS-200-AC-OW  
IMACS 200 System with single 120/220 VAC Power Supply  
IMACS 200 System with two 120/220 VAC Power Supplies and an  
Optical WAN daughter board.  
IMACS-200-RDNT-AC-OW  
IMACS 200 System with single 120/220 VAC Power Supply, a 2-port  
OHSU daughter card and an Optical WAN daughter board.  
IMACS-200-AC-OHSU-OW  
IMACS 200 System with two 120/220 VAC Power Supplies, a 2-port  
OHSU daughter card and an Optical WAN daughter board.  
IMACS-200-RDNT-AC-OHSU-OW  
IMACS-200-125VDC  
IMACS 200 System with single 125 VDC Power Supply  
IMACS 200 System with two 125 VDC Power Supplies  
IMACS-200-RDNT-125VDC  
IMACS 200 System with single 125 VDC Power Supply and a 2-port  
OHSU daughter card  
IMACS-200-125VDC-OHSU  
IMACS-200-RDNT-125VDC-OHSU  
IMACS-200-125VDC-OW  
IMACS 200 System with two 125 VDC Power Supplies and a 2-port  
OHSU daughter card  
IMACS 200 System with single 125 VDC Power Supply and an Optical  
WAN daughter board.  
IMACS 200 System with two 125 VDC Power Supplies and an Optical  
WAN daughter board.  
IMACS-200-RDNT-125VDC-OW  
IMACS-200-125VDC-OHSU-OW  
IMACS-200-RDNT-125VDC-OHSU-OW  
IMACS 200 System with single 125 VDC Power Supply, a 2-port OHSU  
daughter card and an Optical WAN daughter board.  
IMACS 200 System with two 125 VDC Power Supplies, a 2-port OHSU  
daughter card and an Optical WAN daughter board.  
Table 1. IMACS-200 Ordering Guide.  
Product Description  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Available Cabling  
o.  
14  
Available Cabling  
Table 2 describes the cables recommended for use with the IMACS-200 unit.  
Note: Zhone recommends that shielded cables be used to reduce interference that can be  
caused by lightning surge interference.  
Table 2. Recommended cables  
Cable  
Used for  
Manufacturer  
Part Number  
Description  
Voice  
FXS ports  
1210  
50-pin Amphenol  
(M) to 50 pin  
Amphenol (M) (5')  
E&M ports  
Alarm contacts  
Data  
Sub Rate Data  
Port  
1216F or  
1216M  
DB25F to RJ48M or  
DB25M to RJ48M  
(Straight through)  
(5')  
RS-530  
Data  
Data  
Async/sync High 1261F or 1261M  
Speed Data  
DB25M to V.35F or  
DB25M to V.35M  
(5’)  
V.35 port  
Serial (craft) port 1219F  
RJ48M to DB9F  
(25’)  
AC Power  
Ethernet  
AC Power Input  
Ethernet port  
150-00041-01  
Standard  
AC Power Cable (6')  
RJ45  
viii  
Product Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
System Reference Guide ............................................................................... I-iii  
Safety Information and Precautions .............................................................. I-iv  
Disclaimer for Shielded Cables ..................................................................... I-vi  
Panel and Cover Removal ............................................................................. I-vi  
Power Source ................................................................................................. I-vi  
Ordering Guide .............................................................................................. I-vi  
Available Cabling ........................................................................................ I-viii  
IMACS-200 Chassis...................................................................................1-1  
Introduction ....................................................................................................2-1  
Chassis Installation .........................................................................................2-1  
Unpacking the Chassis ...............................................................................2-1  
Pre-Installation Tips ...................................................................................2-2  
Installation Checklist..............................................................................2-2  
Choosing a Location for Your System .......................................................2-2  
Rack Installation Tips.............................................................................2-3  
Tabletop Installation Tips.......................................................................2-3  
Installing the Chassis..................................................................................2-3  
Connecting Cables to the ports.................................................................2-12  
Table of Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Table of Contents  
Power Supply and Ringing Generator ..................................................... 2-13  
Ringing Generator ............................................................................... 2-13  
System Power (Redundancy)................................................................... 2-14  
AC Power Supply and DC Power Supply Fuses ..................................... 2-14  
System Power and Ground Connections ................................................. 2-14  
AC power installation .............................................................................. 2-16  
Powering Up the System.......................................................................... 2-16  
System Power-up ........................................................................................... 3-1  
System Screens .............................................................................................. 3-6  
System Main Screen .................................................................................. 3-6  
Voice and Data Port Status ........................................................................ 3-6  
Service Type Main Screens ....................................................................... 3-7  
Test and Debug Screen ............................................................................ 3-10  
Port Configuration ....................................................................................... 3-10  
Selecting and Configuring Your ports..................................................... 3-10  
Recording Your Configuration Settings .................................................. 3-11  
Reinitializing the System ............................................................................. 3-12  
Alarms ......................................................................................................... 3-14  
Alarm Screens.......................................................................................... 3-14  
Alarm Filter Settings................................................................................ 3-16  
Alarm Cutoff (ACO)................................................................................ 3-18  
Alarm Handling ....................................................................................... 3-18  
Test, Debug, Backup & Restore .............................................................. 3-19  
Debugging the System............................................................................. 3-21  
Backing up the System Configuration Data ............................................ 3-21  
Pre-TFTP Backup and Restore Preparation............................................. 3-21  
3.10 Time Slot Assignment ................................................................................. 3-25  
3.11 Assigning Time Slots ................................................................................... 3-26  
2
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Assigning a Time Slot to a User port Port................................................3-27  
Cross-Connect Model...............................................................................3-28  
3.13 Cross-Connecting WAN Time Slots ............................................................3-32  
3.14 Cross-Connect Actions .................................................................................3-39  
3.15 Recording the Time Slot Configuration .......................................................3-41  
3.16 Power Supply Redundancy ..........................................................................3-41  
Introduction ....................................................................................................4-1  
CPU User Screens and Settings .....................................................................4-2  
CPU Main Screen......................................................................................4-2  
User Names, Passwords and Groups..........................................................4-3  
Other CPU Settings ......................................................................................4-10  
SNMP Network Management ......................................................................4-16  
TCP/IP Network Management .....................................................................4-18  
IP Parameters........................................................................................4-26  
TCP State Parameters...........................................................................4-28  
UDP Parameters...................................................................................4-31  
TELNET Parameters............................................................................4-32  
SNMP Parameters ................................................................................4-33  
SCC Parameters....................................................................................4-34  
SA4 Parameters....................................................................................4-36  
Host Software Upgrade Procedure ...............................................................4-37  
Equipment Requirements .........................................................................4-37  
Pre-TFTP Binary Upload/Download Preparation ....................................4-40  
4.11 CPU Troubleshooting ...................................................................................4-45  
Table of Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Table of Contents  
WAN port Descriptions ................................................................................. 5-1  
WAN port User Screens and Settings ............................................................ 5-2  
WAN Settings for T1 and E1..................................................................... 5-2  
Performance Data ...................................................................................... 5-9  
Far-End Performance Data ...................................................................... 5-12  
Test Screen............................................................................................... 5-14  
WAN port Error Messages .......................................................................... 5-17  
WAN port Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 5-17  
Introduction ................................................................................................... 6-1  
FXS Descriptions ........................................................................................... 6-1  
IMACS-200-FXS Description ................................................................... 6-1  
FXS User Screens and Settings ..................................................................... 6-1  
FXS Main Screen....................................................................................... 6-1  
Test Screen................................................................................................. 6-7  
FXS port Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 6-11  
Introduction ................................................................................................... 7-1  
E&M Description .......................................................................................... 7-1  
IMACS-200 E&M Description ................................................................. 7-1  
E&M port User Screens and Settings ............................................................ 7-6  
E&M port Main Screen.............................................................................. 7-6  
Test Screen............................................................................................... 7-11  
E&M port Error Messages ........................................................................... 7-15  
E&M port Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-15  
SRU port User Screens and Settings ............................................................. 8-1  
Test Screen .................................................................................................... 8-8  
SRU port Error Messages ............................................................................ 8-12  
SRU port Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 8-12  
4
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
HSU Ports .......................................................................................................9-1  
HSU Port Cables.........................................................................................9-2  
HSU Card User Screens and Settings ............................................................9-2  
HSU Card Main Screen..............................................................................9-2  
HSU Card Test Screen..............................................................................9-10  
HSU Error Messages ....................................................................................9-13  
HSU Port Troubleshooting ...........................................................................9-13  
10.2 OHSU port ....................................................................................................10-1  
Two-Port OHSU port Description............................................................10-1  
OHSU port Cables....................................................................................10-2  
10.3 OHSU port User Screens and Settings .........................................................10-2  
10.3.1 OHSU port Main Screen ..........................................................................10-2  
11.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................11-1  
11.2 Alarm port User Screens and Settings ..........................................................11-2  
Alarm Filter Screen Sensor Setting ..........................................................11-2  
Alarm Ports Main Screen .........................................................................11-2  
12.2 IPR Description ............................................................................................12-1  
IMACS 200 IPR .......................................................................................12-1  
12.3 Frame Relay Network ..................................................................................12-2  
IPR Connecting IP LANs .........................................................................12-2  
IPR to the Internet ................................................................................12-3  
IPR........................................................................................................12-4  
12.4 IPR Configuration Screens and Settings ......................................................12-5  
IPR Main Screen.......................................................................................12-5  
Frame Relay Ports Configuration Screen.................................................12-7  
Frame Relay PVC Configuration Screen ...............................................12-10  
Frame Relay Port LMI Screen................................................................12-12  
IP Routing Table Screen.........................................................................12-13  
Static Routes Configuration Screen........................................................12-14  
Table of Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Table of Contents  
13.2 OWAN Port ................................................................................................. 13-1  
OWAN Port Description.......................................................................... 13-1  
OWAN Alarms ........................................................................................ 13-2  
OWAN LED Indications ......................................................................... 13-3  
OWAN port Cables.................................................................................. 13-3  
13.3 OWAN port User Screens and Settings ....................................................... 13-3  
OWAN Optical Port Main Screen ........................................................... 13-4  
13.4 OWAN Port Main Screen Actions .............................................................. 13-5  
13.5 OPTIC WAN Port Screen Actions .............................................................. 13-9  
6
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Table of Contents  
8
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Figures  
IMACS-200 Front Panel.......................................................................................................1-1  
IMACS-200 Rear Panel........................................................................................................1-2  
IMACS-200 Front Panel.......................................................................................................2-4  
Mounting Bracket Holes.......................................................................................................2-4  
Chassis Mounting Holes.......................................................................................................2-5  
Typical Login Screen............................................................................................................3-3  
Typical System Main Screen ................................................................................................3-5  
Typical port Status Display...................................................................................................3-7  
Typical port Main Screen .....................................................................................................3-9  
System Screen - Test and Debug. .......................................................................................3-13  
Cold-Start NVRAM “Zip”Test and Debug Screen.............................................................3-13  
Typical Alarm Screen .........................................................................................................3-14  
Alarm Filters Screen ...........................................................................................................3-16  
Typical Alarm History Screen ............................................................................................3-19  
System Test and Debug Screen ..........................................................................................3-20  
Typical E&M port Time Slot Assignments ........................................................................3-27  
Add a Cross-Connect Circuit Screen..................................................................................3-32  
New Circuit Selection and ID Assignment.........................................................................3-34  
WAN Unit Options .............................................................................................................3-35  
Time Slot and Bandwidth Options......................................................................................3-36  
Delete Cross-Connection Screen ........................................................................................3-40  
CPU Main Screen .................................................................................................................4-2  
List of Figures  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
List of Figures  
Typical TCP/IP Screen....................................................................................................... 4-18  
Typical Network Statistics Screen, Page 1 ........................................................................ 4-24  
Typical Network Statistics Screen, Page 2 ........................................................................ 4-28  
Typical Network Statistics Screen, Page 3 ........................................................................ 4-31  
WAN T1 Port Main Screen.................................................................................................. 5-2  
Line Loopback ..................................................................................................................... 5-5  
Local Loopback.................................................................................................................... 5-5  
Typical Performance Data Screen........................................................................................ 5-9  
Far-End Performance Data Screen..................................................................................... 5-12  
Typical WAN port Test Screen.......................................................................................... 5-14  
Typical FXS port Main Screen ........................................................................................... 6-2  
FXS port Loopbacks ........................................................................................................... 6-5  
Typical FXS port Test Screen............................................................................................. 6-7  
Typical E&M port Main Screen........................................................................................... 7-6  
E&M port Loopbacks.......................................................................................................... 7-9  
Typical E&M port Test Screen ......................................................................................... 7-11  
Typical SRU port Main Screen............................................................................................ 8-2  
SRU Time Slot Integration................................................................................................... 8-5  
Local Loopbacks .................................................................................................................. 8-7  
Typical SRU port Test Screen.............................................................................................. 8-8  
HSU Main Screen ................................................................................................................ 9-2  
HSU Port Time Slot Assignment Screen ............................................................................. 9-5  
2
List of Figures  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Figures  
Local DTE Loopback............................................................................................................9-7  
Local Network Loopback .....................................................................................................9-8  
HSU Port Test Screen.........................................................................................................9-10  
Optional two-Port OHSU port ............................................................................................10-1  
Typical OHSU port Main Screen........................................................................................10-2  
Typical OHSU Port Time Slot Assignment Screen............................................................10-4  
Local User Loopback..........................................................................................................10-5  
Local Network Loopback ...................................................................................................10-5  
Alarm Filter Screen.............................................................................................................11-2  
Alarm Level from the Main Screen ...................................................................................11-3  
IPR Card Connected to IP LANs through Frame Relay Network......................................12-2  
IPR Card Routed to the Internet through Frame Relay Network .......................................12-3  
IPR Card Connected to IP Nodes on Ethernet to Frame Relay Network ...........................12-4  
IPR Ethernet and Default IP Screen ...................................................................................12-5  
IPR Frame Relay Menu ......................................................................................................12-7  
IPR Frame Relay PVC Configuration Screen...................................................................12-10  
IPR Frame Relay Port LMI Screen...................................................................................12-12  
IPR IP Routing Table Screen............................................................................................12-13  
IPR IP Static Routes Configuration Menu Screen............................................................12-14  
Optional Redundant OWAN Port.......................................................................................13-2  
Typical OWAN port Main Screen......................................................................................13-5  
List of Figures  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
List of Figures  
4
List of Figures  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Tables  
Minimum Chassis Clearances ............................................................................................2-5  
Front panel connectors........................................................................................................2-6  
Back panel connectors........................................................................................................2-6  
System Main Screen Actions..............................................................................................3-6  
Time Slot Cross-Connection Options and Defaults .........................................................3-33  
Cross-Connect Screen Actions .........................................................................................3-39  
Time Slot Recording Form for T1 Operation...................................................................3-41  
CPU Main Screen Actions..................................................................................................4-3  
usrName Screen Actions ....................................................................................................4-7  
TCP/IP Screen Actions.....................................................................................................4-19  
TCP/IP Screen Options and Defaults ...............................................................................4-19  
Network Statistics Screen Actions ...................................................................................4-26  
WAN Screen Actions .........................................................................................................5-3  
WAN Screen Option Settings and Defaults .......................................................................5-3  
Performance Data Screen Actions......................................................................................5-9  
Far-End Performance Data Screen Actions......................................................................5-12  
Test Screen Actions..........................................................................................................5-14  
WAN port Test Screen Options........................................................................................5-14  
Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults.........................................................................6-2  
Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults.........................................................................6-3  
Test Screen Actions...........................................................................................................6-7  
Test Screen Option Settings and Defaults ..........................................................................6-7  
Status Information Field Settings ......................................................................................6-9  
Main Screen Actions ..........................................................................................................7-7  
Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults........................................................................7-7  
List of Tables  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
List of Tables  
Test Screen Actions ........................................................................................................ 7-11  
Test Screen Option Settings and Defaults........................................................................ 7-11  
Status Information Field Settings.................................................................................... 7-14  
Main Screen Actions.......................................................................................................... 8-3  
Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults........................................................................ 8-3  
SRU port State Status......................................................................................................... 8-4  
Test Screen Actions ........................................................................................................... 8-9  
HSU Card Main Screen Actions........................................................................................ 9-2  
Test Screen Actions ......................................................................................................... 9-10  
Test Screen Option Settings and Defaults........................................................................ 9-11  
OHSU port Main Screen Actions..................................................................................... 10-3  
Alarm Contacts Main Screen Actions.............................................................................. 11-4  
Alarm Contacts Settings and Defaults ............................................................................. 11-4  
IPR 1Ethernet and Default IP Screen Actions ................................................................. 12-5  
IPR 10B2 and 10BT Ethernet and Default IP Option Settings and Defaults................... 12-6  
IPR Frame Relay Menu Screen Actions .......................................................................... 12-7  
IPR Frame Relay Menu Option Settings and Defaults .................................................... 12-8  
IPR Frame Relay PVC Configuration Screen Actions .................................................. 12-10  
IPR FR PVC Configuration Option Settings and Defaults............................................ 12-11  
IPR IP Static Routes Configuration Table Screen Actions............................................ 12-14  
IPR IP Static Routes Configuration Option Settings and Defaults................................ 12-15  
Test Screen Actions ....................................................................................................... 13-12  
OWAN Port Test Screen Options.................................................................................. 13-12  
2
List of Tables  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Overview  
Introduction  
Chapter 1  
System Overview  
1.1 Introduction  
This chapter describes chassis used by the IMACS-200.  
The IMACS-200 is available with redundant power supplies which operate in a load-sharing  
mode.  
The IMACS-200 chassis is manufactured to be RoHS-compliant.  
The IMACS-200 comes “Industrial hardened” to operate under more extreme temperature  
ranges of -40 degrees Celsius to +70 degrees Celsius (-104 degrees Fahrenheit to +158 degrees  
Fahrenheit).  
1.1.1 IMACS-200 Chassis  
This chassis is designed for table top, wall or rack mounting. All voice and data port access is  
from the rear of the chassis. The craft interface and alarm indication LEDs are located on the  
front of the IMACS-200 unit, as seen in Figure 1-1. The IMACS-200 features an on-board  
ringing generator.  
Figure 1-1.IMACS-200 Front Panel  
The power supply offering with the IMACS-200 comes with either one or two power supplies.  
One power supply is capable of handling all the power needs for the unit. When ordering a  
unit with a redundant power supply, the IMACS-200 operates in a load sharing mode. Should  
one of the two units fail, the other unit will immediately take over powering of the  
IMACS-200.  
System Overview  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
System Overview  
Introduction  
The IMACS-200 offers a range of power input options, which are selected to be the most  
commonly used input voltages in use by our various customers. They are: -48VDC, 125VDC,  
120VAC and 220VAC. The power supply modules are factory installed, and will come with  
the proper connectors configured for the IMACS-200 powering options you have selected.  
The power inputs are to the right and left rear of the IMACS-200, and labeled accordingly. In  
Figure 1-2, the supply inputs are seen on the sides of the rear panel.  
Figure 1-2.IMACS-200 Rear Panel  
Notes:  
1. The two -48VDC and 125VDC feeds are located in the lower-left and lower-right hand  
corners of the IMACS-200 rear panel. Based on ordering options, these ports will arrive  
at the customer site with screw-down terminals contained in an accessory bag in the  
IMACS-200 packaging. For customers who order the single-supply option, the right-hand  
connector above (nearest the T1/E1 and ground screw) should be used. These three-pin  
terminals (if so equipped) are labelled left-to-right as NC (No Connection), -48 or 125 as  
the case may be, and RTN (return).  
2. The two 120VAC and 220VAC feeds are located in the upper-left and upper-right hand  
corners of the IMACS-200 rear panel. Based on ordering options, these ports will arrive  
at the customer site with AC jacks installed. Simply place a North-American AC power  
supply cord into the supplied jacks.  
3. The IMACS-200 comes with two fan units installed in the unit. These fans will turn on  
and off automatically as the temperature fluctuates inside the enclosure. These fans are not  
field serviceable, and will alarm should one of them fail or become obstructed.  
A more detailed description of this chassis and its power capabilities is given in chapter 3.  
1-2  
System Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Installation  
Introduction  
Chapter 2  
System Installation  
2.1 Introduction  
This chapter provides instructions for unpacking and installing the IMACS-200 chassis at the  
user site. It also includes other information you will need to properly install the system and  
refers you to other chapters for additional port-level information.  
The system can operate on either AC or DC power when equipped with the proper power  
supply. Refer to the system specifications section in this manual regarding electrical and  
environmental requirements.  
2.2 Chassis Installation  
2.2.1 Unpacking the Chassis  
When you receive your system, unpack the box and check the contents for damage. Inside the  
box you should have the following three items:  
1. The IMACS-200 system  
2. A CD ROM with the documentation for the latest or ordered release.  
3. A poly bag including the mounting hardware and power cord(s) and or connector(s).  
If any of the items above are missing, please contact your sales representative. If anything is  
damaged, contact the shipping carrier to file a claim. The carrier representative will also tell  
you how to submit a claim, where to send the unit, and give you any special instructions you  
may need.  
Pack the damaged item in its original packing materials and send it by prepaid freight to the  
address you received. If the original packing materials are unavailable, pack the unit in a  
sturdy box and surround it with shock-absorbing material.  
System Installation  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
System Installation  
Chassis Installation  
2.2.2 Pre-Installation Tips  
2.2.2.1 Installation Checklist  
Install your IMACS-200 in the following sequence:  
1. Choose a suitable location for the system, as described in this chapter.  
2. Unpack and inspect the equipment for damage.  
3. Mount the chassis on the desired surface (rack, tabletop, or wall).  
4. Install the chassis ground connections.  
5. Verify the voltage ratings of all power supplies in the chassis.  
6. Verify the fuse ratings of the source power supply.  
7. Apply power to the system and verify the power LED states.  
After successfully installing the system, configure the system for operation as follows:  
1. Connect a VT100-compatible terminal to the Interface port.  
2. Log into the system.  
3. Set the Alarm Filters.  
4. Configure the CPU interface along with the ethernet port if desired.  
5. Configure the Voice ports.  
6. Configure the Data ports.  
7. Configure the WAN ports.  
8. Configure all other ports.  
2.2.3 Choosing a Location for Your System  
The IMACS-200 requires a reasonably dust-free, static-free operating environment. Adequate  
ventilation is also required at the site. Do not install the chassis in direct sunlight, which may  
increase the system’s operating temperature and affect its operation.  
Most of the system plug-in ports have highly sensitive components that could be damaged by  
static electricity. Whenever you handle any system ports, be sure to observe local electrostatic  
discharge (ESD) precautions.  
The system chassis can be installed on an 19-inch or 23-inch equipment rack, or placed on a  
tabletop or other level surface. First though, make sure the desired surface can support the  
weight of a chassis.  
2-2  
System Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Installation  
Chassis Installation  
Be sure to locate the system near all external equipment to which you will connect it. Cable  
lengths and physical/electrical characteristics are critical to system operation, especially for  
data signal interfaces. Generally, higher data rates require shorter cables than lower data rates.  
Also, you must use T1-grade cables for all system connections to those networks. For best  
results, use the cables supplied by your supplier when connecting your system to the  
associated external facilities. For more information on system cabling, call your supplier.  
2.2.3.1 Rack Installation Tips  
When installing the chassis in a rack, allow at least 2 inches (5.1 cm) of space between the  
chassis and the equipment in front and behind it for proper ventilation. Use the mounting  
brackets and attachment hardware furnished with the chassis for this purpose, as outlined in  
this chapter. If you use other mounting hardware, you may damage the chassis or circuit  
boards installed in it.  
Also route all cables to their destinations through conduits to enhance electromagnetic  
compatibility (EMC) performance and facilitate future system troubleshooting. When routing  
cables, be sure not to obstruct any chassis vents.  
2.2.3.2 Tabletop Installation Tips  
The chassis can be placed on a flat, smooth surface (e.g., a table) that is free of contaminants.  
This surface should be capable of supporting the chassis.  
If you are placing the chassis on a tabletop or other flat surface, be sure to leave enough  
clearance for air circulation through the system. Make sure the chassis is accessible from both  
the front and rear.  
2.2.4 Installing the Chassis  
Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the IMACS-200 chassis. To mount the chassis in a rack,  
first attach the brackets to the sides of the chassis, using the four associated 10-32 x 1/4”  
screws. The brackets are reversible for mounting in 19-inch or 23-inch racks (48.2 or 58.4  
cm). For a 19-inch rack, attach the long sides of the brackets to the chassis (Figure 2-2 shows  
the mounting brackets and holes). For a 23-inch rack, attach the short sides of the brackets to  
the chassis. You can attach the brackets to either position on the side of the chassis. See Figure  
2-3 on page 2-5 for a view of the side panel of the IMACS-200.Then, use the four 12-24 x 1/4”  
screws to mount the bracketed chassis on the rack.  
System Installation  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
System Installation  
Chassis Installation  
Figure 2-1.IMACS-200 Front Panel  
Figure 2-2.Mounting Bracket Holes  
The chassis have eleven holes on each side, as shown in Figure 2-3. Eight of these holes  
facilitate mounting in a 19- or 23-inch rack (48.2 or 58.4 cm). You can attach the front, or  
middle of this chassis to a rack, using the mounting brackets as previously shown.  
2-4  
System Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Installation  
Connector Types  
Figure 2-3.Chassis Mounting Holes  
Table 2-1 outlines the minimum clearance that is recommended for the IMACS-200 on all four  
sides.  
Table 2-1. Minimum Chassis Clearances  
Clearance  
Front  
Rear  
Inches  
Centimeters  
10  
25  
10  
25  
2.3 Connector Types  
The product is equipped with several types of electrical connections to the network and power  
sources. Table 2-2 lists the connections on the front panel of the IMACS-200 (Refer to Figure  
2-1 on page 2-4 for an illustration of the IMACS-200 front panel). These connections are  
available for the crafts person to gain easy access into the unit. Table 2-3 lists the back panel  
connectors along with their functionality. (Refer to Figure 2-4 on page 2-5 for an illustration  
of the IMACS-200 back panel)  
Figure 2-4. IMACS-200 Rear Panel  
System Installation  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
System Installation  
Connector Types  
Table 2-2. Front panel connectors  
Connector Name  
Ethernet  
Connector Type  
Description  
RJ45  
RJ45  
Ethernet port for remote management over IP.  
Asynchronous craft port for local management.  
Serial  
Table 2-3. Back panel connectors  
Connector Name  
Connector Type  
Description  
Voice  
50 pin amphenol  
Four E&M lines, transmit only (to) in the introductory offering of the  
IMACS-200. Each line utilizes eight leads from the connector.  
Voice  
Voice  
50 pin amphenol  
50 pin amphenol  
Four FXS Tip-and-Ring pairs. Each line utilizes two leads from the  
connector.  
Alarm input contacts are provided in this connector. There are four  
available contacts, each utilizing two leads from the connector.  
Alarm  
RJ45  
Alarm outputs to an external alarm system.  
Two V.35 high speed data port connectors.  
Five subrate data (SRU) ports  
High Speed Data  
Sub Rate Data  
DB25 female  
RJ45  
OHSU1 and  
OHSU2  
Two ST optical  
connector pairs  
The IMACs-200 can be configured with an Optical High Speed Unit  
with two pairs of optical connections.  
Enet  
RJ45  
Ethernet port for remote management over IP. This port is disabled for  
this initial release of the product.  
T1/E1  
RJ45  
Four transmit and receive pairs for T1 network access. E1 will be  
provided in a later release.  
48VDC (+-G) 1.5A 3 position  
Max  
For DC power inputs. IMACS-200 can have two DC inputs.The  
cables used to connect the power to the chassis should be 20 to 18  
gauge solid wire.  
(plugs included  
125VDC (label)  
120/220VAC  
with kit of parts)  
AC receptacles  
Power input 1.0A 50/60Hz when external AC voltage is used to  
power the unit.The IMACS-200 can have two such supplies.  
Two ST optical  
Connectors  
The IMACs-200 can be configured with an Optical WAN Unit with  
two optical connections.  
OWAN1 OWAN2  
Earth Ground  
Permanent Earth Ground Connection. Use 14 gauge solid wire for  
a single connection to the provided earth ground screw, and  
connect to a ground source.  
2-6  
System Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Installation  
Connector Pin-outs  
2.4 Connector Pin-outs  
Following is a description of the various connectors and their respective pin-outs.  
2.4.1 High Speed Data port connector pinouts  
Table 2-4 describes the signals and pins for the V.35 data ports. The pin assignments are associated with  
the use of Zhone cable part number 1216M (F).  
Table 2-4. V.35 DB25 female connector  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Source  
V.35 (with PRM-1261F cable)  
Shield  
A
P
2
Transmit Data A  
Receive Data A  
Request to Send  
Clear to Send  
DTE  
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
DCE  
3
R
C
D
E
B
F
4
5
6
Data Set Ready  
Ground  
7
8
Receive Line Signal Detector  
Receive Timing A  
External Transmit Clock B  
Terminal Timing B  
Transmit Timing A  
Not Connected  
DCE  
DCE  
9
X
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
Not Used  
DCE  
AA  
Transmit Data B  
Transmit Timing B  
Receive Data B  
Receive Timing B  
Not Connected  
DTE  
DCE  
DCE  
DCE  
S
Y
T
V
Not Connected  
Data Terminal Ready  
Remote Loopback  
Local Loopback  
DTE  
DTE  
DTE  
H
N
J
System Installation  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
System Installation  
Connector Pin-outs  
Table 2-4. V.35 DB25 female connector  
Pin  
23  
Signal  
Source  
V.35 (with PRM-1261F cable)  
External Transmit Clock A  
Terminal Timing A  
Test Mode  
24  
Not Used  
DCE  
U
25  
NN  
Note: For purposes of connection and function, the IMACS-200 should be considered a DCE.  
2.4.2 E&M, FXS and Alarm input connector  
Table 2-5 lists the connector pinouts for the E&M circuits, FXS circuit and the provided alarm input  
points. For E&M, “R”, “T” and “M” are consider input direction, “R1”, “T1” and “E” are considered  
output direction, and “SB” and “SG” are considered direction-neutral.  
Table 2-5. 25-pair female amphenol connector  
Port  
Designation  
Pin  
Port  
Designation Pin  
E&M T-1  
Port 1  
26  
E&M  
Port 4  
T-4  
38  
13  
39  
14  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
E&M R-1  
Port1  
1
E&M  
Port4  
R-4  
E&M T1-1  
Port 1  
27  
2
E&M  
Port 4  
T1-4  
R1-4  
E-4  
E&M R1-1  
Port 1  
E&M  
Port 4  
E&M E-1  
Port 1  
28  
3
E&M  
Port 4  
E&M M-1  
Port 1  
E&M  
Port 4  
M-4  
SG-4  
SB-4  
T-1  
E&M SG-1  
Port 1  
29  
4
E&M  
Port 4  
E&M SB-1  
Port 1  
E&M  
Port 4  
E&M T-2  
Port 2  
30  
5
FXS  
Port 1  
E&M R-2  
Port 2  
FXS  
Port 1  
R-1  
2-8  
System Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Installation  
Connector Pin-outs  
Table 2-5. 25-pair female amphenol connector  
Port  
Designation  
Pin  
Port  
Designation Pin  
E&M T1-2  
Port 2  
31  
FXS  
Port 2  
T-2  
R-2  
T-3  
R-3  
T-4  
R-4  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
E&M R1-2  
Port 2  
6
FXS  
Port 2  
E&M E-2  
Port 2  
32  
7
FXS  
Port 3  
E&M M-2  
Port 2  
FXS  
Port 3  
E&M SG-2  
Port 2  
33  
8
FXS  
Port 4  
E&M SB-2  
Port 2  
FXS  
Port 4  
E&M T-3  
Port 3  
34  
9
ALM  
1A  
Alarm  
contact  
E&M R-3  
Port 3  
ATM  
1B  
Alarm  
contact  
E&M T1-3  
Port 3  
35  
10  
36  
11  
37  
12  
ALM  
2A  
Alarm  
contact  
E&M R1-3  
Port 3  
ALM  
2B  
Alarm  
contact  
E&M E-3  
Port 3  
ALM  
3A  
Alarm  
contact  
E&M M-3  
Port 3  
ALM  
3B  
Alarm  
contact  
E&M SG-3  
Port 3  
ALM  
4A  
Alarm  
contact  
E&M SB-3  
Port 3  
ALM  
4B  
Alarm  
contact  
NC  
NC  
Not Used  
Not Used  
50  
25  
2.4.3 T1 interface RJ45 connector  
Table 2-6 lists the T1 RJ45 connector pinouts.  
System Installation  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
System Installation  
Connector Pin-outs  
Table 2-6. T1 connector pinouts  
RJ-45(F) Pin  
Signal  
1
R1  
2
T1  
4
R
5
T
3, 6, 7, 8  
Not assigned  
2.4.4 Ethernet connections  
Table 2-7 lists the RJ45 connector pinouts for the ethernet ports on the front and rear of the chassis.  
Table 2-7. Ethernet connector pinouts  
RJ-45(F) Pin  
Signal  
TXP  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TXN  
RXP  
TXCT  
RXCT  
RXN  
Not used  
Ground  
2.4.5 Sub Rate Data Ports  
Table 2-8 lists the RJ45 connector pinouts for the five sub rate data ports on the rear of the chassis.  
Table 2-8. Sub Rate Data (SRU) ports connector pinouts  
RJ-45(F) Pin  
Signal  
SCT  
Direction  
Output  
1
2
3
4
5
RLSD  
SCR  
Output  
Output  
Ground  
RXD  
Output  
2-10  
System Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
System Installation  
Connector Pin-outs  
Table 2-8. Sub Rate Data (SRU) ports connector pinouts  
RJ-45(F) Pin  
Signal  
TXD  
CTS  
Direction  
Input  
6
7
8
Output  
Input  
RTS  
2.4.6 Alarm Output Connector  
The IMACS-200 is equipped with an RJ45 connection on the rear faceplate labelled ALARM to drive  
external alarm responders such as buzzers, bells, and lights. Table 2-9 indicates the pin-outs for this  
RJ45 connector.the T1 RJ45 connector pinouts.  
Table 2-9. Alarm Output Connector pinouts  
RJ-45(F) Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Alarm Output 1C  
Alarm Output 1  
Alarm Output 2C  
Alarm Output 2  
Alarm Output 3C  
Alarm Output 3  
Alarm Output 4C  
Alarm Output 4  
2.4.7 Serial port - Craft Interface  
The IMACS-200 is equipped with an RJ45 connection on the front faceplate labelled SERIAL to allow  
crafts person access to the IMACS-200 at all times.  
Table 2-10. Serial port interface connector pinouts  
RJ-45(F) Pin  
Signal  
4
Ground  
Receive  
Transmit  
Not used  
5
6
1,2,3,7,8  
System Installation  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
o.  
System Installation  
Connector Pin-outs  
2.4.8 Connecting Cables to the ports  
Connect system ports to the external equipment, using the proper cables. The ports have  
various types of connectors for those connections.  
Voice ports have a 50-pin Amphenol-type jack. To connect a cable to this type of jack, first  
plug the male connector of the cable into the jack and push it in all the way. Then, tighten the  
mounting screws on either end of the cable connector shroud to the IMACS-200 connector.  
For modular (RJ-45) jacks, push the cable’s mating plug into the jack until it snaps into place.  
However, do not try to force the plug into the jack.  
For DB-25 jacks, first plug the cable’s mating connector firmly into the jack. Then, thread the  
screws on either side of the cable connector shroud into the standoffs on either side of the port  
jacks, and hand-tighten them.  
For a list of available cables for the IMACS-200, refer to Table 2 in the Product Description  
section in the front of this user guide.  
2-12  
System Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Installation  
Power and Grounding on the IMACS-200  
2.5 Power and Grounding on the IMACS-200  
2.5.1 Power Supply and Ringing Generator  
The power supply and ringing generator system can consist of up to two power supplies, and  
has one on-board ringing generator. The IMACS-200 comes with the proper power supplies  
factory-assembled depending on the ordering information provided at the time of purchase.  
2.5.1.1 Ringing Generator  
The Ringing Generator on the IMACS-200 outputs 86Vrms at 20Hz. That is the output if  
ringing into a 1 to 4 REN load. If the load increases, the built-in overload protection will  
reduce the output voltage in steps as shown in Table 2-11.  
Table 2-11. Ringing Generator Load Versus REN  
Load[1REN =  
Output Ringing Amplitude  
6930Ohms and 8  
picoFarads]  
86 Vrms  
4REN  
75 Vrms  
5REN  
70 Vrms  
6REN  
60 Vrms  
8REN  
50 Vrms  
10REN  
12REN  
>>12REN  
45 Vrms  
Short Circuit Protection Active  
This ability inherent in the IMACS-200 provides continuous service up to 12 North American  
REN loads without distortion.  
Following is more detailed information regarding the power inputs.  
System Installation  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
System Installation  
Power and Grounding on the IMACS-200  
2.5.2 System Power (Redundancy)  
The IMACS-200 provides power redundancy for any of the powering options. The supplies  
are factory-installed, and the external connectors to receive the powering options selected will  
be pre-installed on the unit. Figure 2-4 on page 2-5 high-lites the location of the Power Supply  
feeds.The 120VAC and 220VAC power inputs are lightly shaded, and the -48VDC and  
125VDC options are darkly shaded.  
2.5.3 AC Power Supply and DC Power Supply Fuses  
The AC power supply and DC Power Supply fuses are already built in to the supplies. These  
fuses are not field serviceable. When unpacking the unit, an AC power cord will be in the box  
for each of the AC power supplies ordered. The AC inlet connector is located in the rear  
corners of the chassis. For a single supplied unit, the rear right-hand connector will be  
equipped. Refer to the system specifications section in this manual for input power  
requirements.  
2.5.4 System Power and Ground Connections  
After installing the system, make the power and ground connections to the chassis as  
described in this section. A frame ground connection is provided in the right-rear corner of the  
IMACS-200 rear panel.  
2.5.5 Grounding requirements  
Due to the UL regulatory requirements, a mounting stud is required for connection of the AC  
input earth ground lead to the product chassis. The ground lead must be connected to the  
chassis using a No. 6 screw, which is included. When grounding the system, use 14 gauge  
solid wire for a single connection to the provided earth ground screw. The mounting location  
is labeled with the IEC 417 No. 5019 symbol to identify this as the AC earth ground  
connection point. This mounting stud is located next to the IEC 320 AC input connector.  
2.5.6 Chassis with Power Supplies  
Figure 2-4 on page 2-5 shows the different power connections on the chassis.  
For DC powered systems, the lower right and lower left-hand connections provide for  
separate, redundant power feeds to the system's pre-installed DC power supplies if so  
equipped. These two sets of leads provide a connection for separate, redundant power feeds  
to the system in a load-sharing mode.  
2-14  
System Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Installation  
Power and Grounding on the IMACS-200  
The telecommunications voice signaling ground is a referenced ground connection to the  
-48VDC power system. Both feeds are referenced to the same place within the IMACS-200.  
This reference ground can occur at the -48VDC power source. If the ground connection is  
not maintained, and one side of the connection equipment is not referenced to an earth  
ground then a floating ground condition can occur causing the voice circuits and the  
voice signaling to react erratically when either end of the connecting equipment tries to  
start the circuit.  
Sites using only loop start telecommunication circuits (no ground start or E&M signaling) can  
operate properly without the Telecom Signaling Ground.  
When grounding the system, use 14 gauge solid wire for a single connection to the provided  
earth ground screw.  
For AC powered systems, the right and left-hand connections provide for separate, redundant  
power feeds to the system's pre-installed AC power supplies if so equipped. These two sets of  
leads provide a connection for separate, redundant power feeds to the system in a load-sharing  
mode.  
2.5.7 DC power installation  
When wiring to an external power source, such as a battery rack, fuse panel, or circuit breaker,  
make sure that the correct rating of wire is used. Figure 2-5 illustrates the DC power plug. It  
is recommended that you use 20 to 18 gauge solid wire.  
Figure 2-5. DC Power plug  
When the IMACS-200 is ordered with a single-power supply unit, the IMACS-200 will come  
with the power supply installed on the right-hand rear of the box, closest to the T1/E1 ports  
and grounding screw. Insert the power plug illustrated above into this right-hand rear  
connector.  
System Installation  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
System Installation  
Power and Grounding on the IMACS-200  
2.5.8 AC power installation  
If ordered as an AC unit, the IMACS-200 will come pre-assembled with one or two AC  
connectors on the rear panel, as illustrated in Figure 2-4 on page 2-5. To apply the AC source  
to the unit, simply use the supplied AC cords included in the packaging to connect the  
IMACS-200 to the 120VAC or 220VAC source.  
2.5.9 Powering Up the System  
After connecting the chassis to the external power sources and making the proper ground  
connections, apply power to the chassis. Plug the AC power cord into the associated electrical  
outlets, or turn on the external DC power supply. Then, observe the following front-panel  
LEDs:  
1. On start-up, all LEDs on the front and rear of the unit cycle through the following color  
sequence:  
Orange, Green, Red and blank.  
2. The POWER LED then will turn green on the chassis faceplate. The ACTIVE LED will  
stay orange until the unit boot cycle is completed, and then turn green.  
If no LEDs illuminate, verify that the external power source is providing power to the chassis,  
and check the connection between that source and the chassis.  
Once power is confirmed, the user interface should appear. If not, simply hit carriage return.  
A window like Figure 2-6 should appear. Type in the user name of “admin”, and the password  
is “admin”.  
Figure 2-6. IMACS-200 Initial Login Screen  
2-16  
System Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Configuration and Operation  
Basic Operations  
Chapter 3  
System Configuration and Operation  
3.1 Basic Operations  
This chapter provides instructions for configuring the IMACS-200 for operation after  
installing it at the equipment site.  
Before performing the procedures in this chapter:  
1. Be sure your IMACS-200 is installed and powered up.  
2. Determine your system’s specific configuration requirements. These depend on your  
network and customer premises equipment (CPE) interfaces. If this configuration  
information already exists, obtain it from your system administrator or engineers.  
3. Obtain a terminal with VT-100 or VT-102 emulation and an RS-232 to RJ45 serial cable  
for these procedures. The terminal will be connected directly to the SERIAL port on the  
front faceplate of your system. This will allow you to access the system and then configure  
it for operation with your network and CPE.  
Refer the Table 2-10 on page 2-11 for pinouts for RS-232 and SERIAL port.  
3.2 Basic Screen Map and Legend  
To make system access, configuration and testing easy, the system presents you with a series  
of user interface screens. Each screen displays various fields of information, and you can  
change the data in those fields as required by your system and external interfaces.  
3.3 System Power-up  
The IMACS-200 system will initialize when it is powered up. The normal sequence for  
initialization and login are described on the following pages.  
System Operation  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
System Power-up  
3.3.1 System Boot  
Following the application of power, proceed as follows:  
1. Be sure your system and local terminal are both powered up.  
2. Connect a VT100-compatible terminal to the SERIAL jack on the faceplate of the  
IMACS-200 front panel. Use a cable with an RJ-45 modular plug on one end for this  
connection.  
3. Configure the terminal to operate at 9.6 kbps, 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.  
Should your SERIAL cable be connected prior to powering the IMACS-200, or should  
power be removed and re-applied to the IMACS-200 during this process, the following  
screen will appear:  
Figure 3-1.Testing and Initialization Screen  
4. Press the RETURN key. The Login Screen appears.  
The system will display Figure 3-1 above. When testing and initializing is complete the screen  
will go blank. Press the <Enter> key. The System Login Screen will display, as seen in Figure  
3-2  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Configuration and Operation  
3.3.2 Logging Into the System  
System Power-up  
The first step in starting a user session is to log into the system. You must enter a password  
that allows you to perform the required tasks on the system. For access levels and user  
permissions, refer to the section detailing user access in Section 4.3.2 on page 3 of Chapter 4  
IMACS-200 General Features.  
To log into the system from a local terminal, proceed as follows. To log in from a remote PC  
refer to details later in this reference manual.  
1. Press <Enter>. The Login Screen depicted in Figure 3-2 should appear. If not, press  
<Enter> again until it does.  
2. If the Login Screen does not appear after you press <Enter> several times, check your  
terminal settings (they should be 9.6 kbps, eight data bits, no parity, and one stop bit).  
Figure 3-2.Typical Login Screen  
3. Contact your system administrator for your Username and Password. Enter your  
Username, and press either the <enter> or <tab> key. Then enter your Password and press  
RETURN to accept the password, which will allow you to configure your system after  
logging in for the very first time. Refer to Section 4.3.2 on page 3-3 for descriptions of the  
various user levels.  
4. Should you be the system administrator, the default Username is admin and the  
password is admin. As this constitutes a Superuser access, it is highly recommended that  
this default password be changed to prevent unauthorized access and enhance the security  
of the IMACS-200. Refer to Section 4.3.2 on page 3 of Chapter 4 for further information.  
System Operation  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
System Power-up  
5. Once system access has been obtained, the IMACS 200 will prompt the user to assign  
WAN and OWAN (if provisoined) port defaults. All four of the WAN or OWAN ports  
must be set to the same interface type (T1 or E1). This main screen is shown in Figure 3-3.  
Currently, the OWAN and WAN must be set to the same interface type, either E1 or T1.  
Caution should be exercised when choosing the interface type to the WAN and OWAN.  
All four ports available to the interface must be set to the same type, and changing the type  
will require a reboot of the system software, dropping all services. Prior to the change, all  
existing services and WAN / OWAN ports must be in the standby state.  
Figure 3-3.WAN and OWAN Interface Un-provisioned Setting  
Once the WAN and OWAN Types have been set as either T1 or E1, the user must save the  
setting. This will prompt a reboot of the IMACS 200, and once completed then the typical  
login screen will appear, as seen in step 6.  
6. The System Main Screen appears. Figure 3-4 shows this screen.  
3-4  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration and Operation  
System Power-up  
Figure 3-4.Typical System Main Screen  
This completes the login process. If you are not familiar with the user interface screens of the  
system, read the next section before proceeding. Otherwise, continue with the desired  
operation.  
System Operation  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
System Screens  
3.4 System Screens  
The system screen will display each port that is currently installed onto the system along with  
the port status and location.  
3.4.1 System Main Screen  
After you log in, a System Main Screen Figure 3-6 appears, showing all of the ports currently  
in the system. The port types and current port operational states also appear in this screen.  
The highlighted line at the bottom of the screen lists some actions. Press the letter key that  
corresponds to the desired action you want to perform. For example, to go to the Alarms  
Screen (Alarms action) and see the current system alarms, press “a” (can be typed in either  
uppercase or lowercase). Table 3-1 summarizes the System Main Screen actions.  
Table 3-1. System Main Screen Actions  
Action  
Alarms  
Function  
Brings up the Alarm Screen. Refer to "Alarms and Alarm Filters” later in  
this chapter.  
Xcon  
Brings up the cross-connect screens.  
sYstem  
Logout  
Oos  
Brings up the system screen for high-level system testing and maintenance.  
Logs you off the system.  
Allows authorized operators restart the unit.  
3.4.2 Voice and Data Port Status  
The System Main Screen also displays the status of the individual circuit ports of all WAN,  
Voice and Dataports in the system. This information appears next to the port type, as shown  
in Figure 3-5. The lowercase letters in the Status column fields indicate the states of the  
individual port ports. The possible values for each port are s (Standby), a (Active), t (Test),  
and l (currently in a Loopback state).  
3-6  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Configuration and Operation  
System Screens  
Figure 3-5.Typical port Status Display  
From the System Main Screen, you can also access other screens, as shown in Figure 3-5.  
These screens are described in the following paragraphs.  
3.4.3 Service Type Main Screens  
Each port type in the system has a port Main Screen associated with it. You can go from the  
System Main Screen to any port Main Screen and configure that device. From a port Main  
Screen, you can access a Test Screen to perform tests on the port, or (in some cases) a  
Performance Monitor Screen to view transmission performance data.  
Figure 3-5 shows the main screen of the IMACS-200 and reflects the port status. On the FXS  
line, the user will note the four different ports, and that each port is in a different state. Port  
one is on the left, and port four is on the right. The figure displays ‘aslt’ as the status of ports  
one through four, which are: port 1 is in active state. Port two is in standby state, which is to  
say it is out of service.Port three is in the loopback active state, in other words it is currently  
involved in a user-initiated maintenance mode. And finally port four is in a test state, which  
is a user-initiated testing mode. These states are used commonly on all the different service  
types, and are a quick reference for the status of each port.  
Figure 3-6 shows a typical port Main Screen. The highlighted line at the top of every screen  
is the header. It lists the node name of the system, the current port type and abbreviated  
description, the port design revision and serial number, and the current system date and time.  
System Operation  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
System Screens  
The port configuration parameters and current option settings appear in numerous rows and  
columns below the header. This region of each screen lists the options on the left and one or  
more associated columns of data fields from left to right. You can change the settings in those  
fields as required for each port.  
The status and data entry change line appears just above the bottom line of the screen. When  
you choose a field to edit and press <Enter>, this line shows the currently available option  
settings for that field. Make all configuration changes on this line.  
3-8  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration and Operation  
System Screens  
The highlighted area in the upper right corner shows the current alarm status data. In Figure  
3-6 below, a yellow alarm has occurred on WAN port 4, and a Loss of Signal alarm has been  
detected on WAN port 3.  
Figure 3-6.Typical port Main Screen  
The bottom line of each port Main Screen lists other actions you can perform by simply  
pressing the letter key that corresponds to the uppercase letter of your desired action. In Figure  
3-6, for example, if you press “s”, you will invoke the Save command, which saves the current  
option settings in the system’s memory. The actions you can choose from this line depend on  
which port and screen you are currently accessing. Refer to the associated chapters in this  
guide for descriptions of those actions.  
System Operation  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Port Configuration  
3.4.4 Test and Debug Screen  
You can also go from the System Main Screen to a Test and Debug Screen, which allows you  
to perform system-level maintenance operations. You can back up the system configuration  
onto an external computer after saving and subsequently editing it, and (if necessary) you can  
restore that configuration to the system. You also can erase the system configuration and  
restart the system with a single “zip” command.  
The system software also has a built-in debugging utility. However, this utility is only  
available to factory software engineers. The system maintenance functions are described in  
the “Testing and Debugging” section later in this chapter.  
3.5 Port Configuration  
3.5.1 Selecting and Configuring Your ports  
The System Main Screen lists all system ports. You can access any port from the Main Screen  
by moving the cursor in the installed interfaces column with the arrow keys until the desired  
port is highlighted, then press <Enter>. The associated port Main Screen now appears. The  
only optional installed interface on the IMACS-200 is the Optical High Speed Data Unit  
(OHSU).  
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor around in any port screen. When changing port  
parameters, some settings require you to enter your own values on the keyboard, while others  
allow you to select from a list of pre-programmed option settings.  
To enter a user-defined value in a field, first highlight that field by moving the cursor to it and  
press <Enter>. Then, type the desired value on your keyboard and press <Enter> to store it in  
that field.  
To choose an option setting from a list of displayed options, press <Enter> with the associated  
parameter field highlighted. A series of available option settings now appears for that field.  
Use the right-arrow and left-arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired setting, and press  
<Enter> to store that setting in the highlighted field.  
Be sure to configure each port according to your networking requirements. From the System  
Main Screen, select each port in turn and change the options for that port from its Main Screen.  
Select the Save command by pressing “s” after making all the changes for a port, then press  
m” to return to the System Main Screen and choose another port. Similarly configure each  
remaining port in your system.  
Once configured, the port settings are permanently stored in Non-Volatile Random Access  
Memory (NVRAM).  
3-10  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Configuration and Operation  
Port Configuration  
3.5.2 Recording Your Configuration Settings  
You should always record the configuration option settings for each port after you set them.  
This information may be needed later for system operation. To record the port configuration  
data, first photocopy the pages showing the port Screens in the associated chapters of this  
guide. Then, mark the option settings you want to use on those pages, and store the pages in a  
safe place where they can be readily obtained.  
You can also record screen settings by “capturing” each edited screen onto your computer  
terminal while you are logged into the system. To do this, your computer must have a software  
program capable of capturing the actual screens as text files. The communications software  
you use to access the system may have this ability. You can then copy the screens to a word  
processing program, print them out, and / or store them electronically.  
System Operation  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Reinitializing the System  
3.6 Reinitializing the System  
The system stores information about its currently installed ports, the port configuration option  
settings, WAN connections, passwords, and other data in nonvolatile memory (NVRAM).  
When you change any settings on the port types, the NVRAM remembers the previous port  
settings.  
Restart capability is available on the IMACS-200. If the user desires to restart the  
IMACS-200, capability is available on the main login screen with the Oos command. This  
command will restart the box, as shown in Figure 3-7. preserving all provisioned data.  
Figure 3-7.Rebooting the IMACS-200  
If you have redeployed the IMACS-200, or otherwise desire to re-initialize the unit to the  
default settings, you can “zip” it, causing it to be reprogrammed. From the main login screen,  
enter ‘Y’ to go to sYstem. A screen such as what is seen in Figure 3-8 appears  
3-12  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Configuration and Operation  
Reinitializing the System  
.
Figure 3-8.System Screen - Test and Debug.  
Once here, enter ‘Z’ to zip the system, and the screen seen in Figure 3-9 will appear.  
Figure 3-9.Cold-Start NVRAM “Zip”Test and Debug Screen.  
WARNING!  
Confirming the "Z" command will start the ZIP process. "Zipping" the system deletes all of  
the information stored on NVRAM and resets it. All ports must then be completely  
reconfigured. When the zip is performed, user names and password data will be maintained.  
System Operation  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Alarms  
When you press “z”, the system will ask, "OK to Zip the system (y/n)"? Press “y” to have the  
system test and re initialize itself. All NVRAM information will be erased from the  
IMACS-200, and a new log-in screen will appear. Since the user names and passwords are  
maintained over the zip function, the user will be able to login as normal. Also maintained  
over the zip function are the IP address(es) saved in the unit.  
3.7 Alarms  
Alarms warn you of problems by reporting possible system hardware or external facility  
failures. The Alarm screen is accessed from the System Main Screen by pressing the "A" key  
to go to the Alarm Screen (see Figure 3-10 through Figure 3-12). The Alarm Screen displays  
the currently active alarms (if any) and provides access to the Alarm Filters and Alarm History  
screens. Figure 3-10 shows a typical Alarm Screen with an active alarm.  
3.7.1 Alarm Screens  
Refer to Figure 3-10. To view the current system alarms, you can go from the System Main  
Screen to an Alarm Screen. From the Alarm Screen, you can then go to an Alarm Filters  
Screen and set up the alarm reporting filters. Or, you can access an Alarm History Screen (log)  
and view alarms that were previously logged by the system. These screens and operations are  
discussed in the “Alarms and Alarm Filters” section later in this chapter.  
Figure 3-10.Typical Alarm Screen  
The first character set (00513 in the above display) is the Alarm Sequence Number. This is a  
sequential number from 1 to 65,535. It identifies the alarm for tracking and maintenance. In  
the above example, the Alarm Sequence Number is 513.  
The second character set (WAN-4) is the location of the problem. In this case, the WAN port  
WAN-4 is affected and has reported the alarm.  
3-14  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Configuration and Operation  
Alarms  
The third character set is the alarm modifier (in this case, m indicates a minor alarm). See the  
“Alarms and Alarm Filters” section later in this chapter for more information about alarm  
modifiers.  
The fourth character set (YEL) is the type of alarm generated (in this case, a Yellow alarm on  
WAN port WAN-4).  
The last two character sets are the date and time the alarm was logged.  
System Operation  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Alarms  
3.7.2 Alarm Filter Settings  
You can set filters for each alarm so that the alarm reports occurrences in a number of different  
ways. Figure 3-11 shows the Alarm Filters screen, which is accessed by pressing "f" (Filters  
command) on the Alarm Screen.  
Figure 3-11.Alarm Filters Screen  
The first column of the Alarm Filters Screen is the alarm abbreviation that appears when an  
alarm is generated. The second column is the associated full name of each alarm. Table 3-2  
describes each alarm appearing in the Alarm Filters Screen.  
The third column contains the filters ignore, log, and report. Set the filter to ignore if you  
want the system to ignore the alarm. Or, set it to log if you want the system to show the alarm  
report on the screen and also log it into the Alarm History, as described later in this chapter.  
Set the filter to report if you want the system to send (report) the alarm indication to a remote  
device. With this setting, the system will also display the alarm report on the screen and log it  
into the Alarm History.  
The fourth column of the Alarm Filters Screen contains the filter modifiers info, minor,  
major, and crit. This column specifies a level of importance (information only, minor alarm,  
major alarm, or critical alarm) for each alarm. These settings are described later in this chapter.  
The last column sets the alarm cutoff (ACO) to aco-off or aco-on. These settings are explained  
later in this chapter.  
The filter in the third column takes precedence over its modifier. If, for instance, you have an  
alarm filter set to ignore, the setting of the modifier as info, minor, major, or crit will be  
ignored. Refer to system specifications section in this manual for alarms and their meanings.  
3-16  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Configuration and Operation  
Alarms  
Table 3-2. Alarm Filters  
Filter  
Alarm  
Meaning  
NOS  
LOS  
YEL  
No Signal  
Loss of Synchronization  
Yellow Alarm  
Incoming WAN signal is lost.  
Frame Alignment is lost.  
The system has received a Yellow Alarm signal from a remote device.  
Usually received when the device loses WAN signal or synchronization.  
The system has received a Blue Alarm signal from a remote device. Usually  
received when the remote or intermediate device has a major failure.  
The local incoming WAN signal has a serious problem and trunk  
conditioning is started. After receiving a RED alarm (NOS or LOS) for 2-3  
seconds, the system initiates the appropriate trunk conditioning sequence  
(see voice ports for information about the TC_CGA setting) and sends a  
Yellow Alarm to the remote device. If the system is in drop/insert mode, it  
also sends an AIS signal to the downstream equipment.  
AIS  
Alarm Information Signal  
Carrier Group Alarm - Red  
CGA_RED  
CGA_YEL  
Carrier Group Alarm - Yellow The system has initiated trunk conditioning in response to a Yellow Alarm  
from a remote device. After 2-3 seconds, the system initiates the appropriate  
trunk conditioning sequence (see voice ports for information about the  
TC_CGA setting).  
ERR  
Excessive Error Rate  
Alarm port Sensor  
Temperature Alarm  
The error rate measured by the system has exceeded the threshold set on the  
WAN port.  
The Alarm port sensor has received an alarm indication from an attached  
device.  
The IMACS-200 has exceeded it’s ability to regulate the temperature in the  
unit, and external action is required.  
SENSOR  
HI-TEMP  
FANFAIL  
UCA  
Cooling Fan Failure  
User port/port alarm  
One of the two supplied fans has failed.  
One or more active ports on a user port are not working properly. Voice ports  
will show an alarm for excessive signaling transitions and data ports will  
show an alarm for exceeding the data error threshold.  
The system has been reset by either loss of power or by a system software  
upgrade.  
The ACO option forces you to manually clear certain alarms. Without this  
option, self-correcting alarms might not be noticed. When the ACO option is  
set to either Report or Log and the modifier is set to Major, alarms will report  
normally but will also generate an ACO alarm. If the modifier is set to Minor,  
it will not generate the ACO alarm. If the filter is set to Ignore, no alarms will  
be generated. This can depend on whether or not the IMACS-200 is set for  
latch or cur.  
RESET  
ACO  
System reset  
Alarm Cut-Off  
SYNC  
Clock Sync Alarm  
The SYNC alarm is generated when either the primary or secondary external  
clock source is lost. This alarm is in addition to the condition that lost the  
clock source (CGA-RED or OOS).  
WARNING!Alarm Modifiers  
Each alarm may also be designated as I=info, m=minor, M=major or C=crit. The filter  
modifier appears on both the active alarm and alarm history screens.  
System Operation  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Alarms  
When interfacing to the External Alarm ports, the occurrence of any alarm designated as crit  
will trigger a form-C relay contact on the External Alarm port. The relay contact action sets  
off an annunciator or lamp at the equipment site. Similarly, the occurrence of any alarm  
designated as major triggers a different contact and activates another external indicator. Refer  
to the Alarm port Reference Guide for more information on the External Alarm ports.  
3.7.3 Alarm Cutoff (ACO)  
The ACO (Alarm Cutoff) security feature is used by the system to alert an operator to alarms  
that clear themselves while the system is unattended. The ACO option settings are aco-on and  
aco-off. If ACO is set to report or log alarms, any alarm set to report or log with a major  
modifier brings up an additional alarm message on the screen. You must manually clear this  
message, which is the ACO alarm message (depends on whether or not IMACS-200 is set for  
latch or CUR). The ACO is used with the node port of the Interface port. It can also trigger an  
external alarm device, such as a bell or lamp, that must also be manually cleared.  
All ACO alarms must be cleared from the Interface port screen. ACO alarms can be cleared  
automatically or manually.  
3.7.4 Alarm Handling  
Alarms set to either log or report record occurrences automatically to the Alarm History  
Screen. To view that screen, press “h” (History command) in the Alarm Screen. Figure 3-12  
shows a typical Alarm History Screen, in which you can update the log with any new alarms  
that occur. To do this, press “r” to select Refresh in the Alarm History Screen. Or, to delete  
all entries in the log, press “c” to select Clear in the Alarm History Screen.  
The alarm log may contain more than one screen (page) of data. To scroll through the log,  
press “u” or “d” (pgUp or pgDn) to move up one page or down one page at a time. The latest  
alarms appear at the beginning of the log, which is on the first page of the alarm log.  
All alarms (except those set to ignore) appear in the Alarms field in the upper right corner of  
the screen, regardless of their setting in the Alarm Filters screen. The display in the Alarms  
field is an abbreviated version of the alarm name and location number. For example,  
CGA_RED below indicates that WAN port 2 has had a Major red alarm.  
3-18  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Configuration and Operation  
Cross-Connecting (XCON)  
Figure 3-12.Typical Alarm History Screen  
3.8 Cross-Connecting (XCON)  
From the System Main Screen, you can access a Cross-Connect Screen by pressing “x”  
(Xcon) that lets you cross-connect WAN time slots between T1 links. For a detailed  
description of making connections on and through the IMACS-200, see Section 3.10 on page  
25 for information regarding making and managing cross-connects.  
3.9 System Level Maintenance  
You can also go from the System Main Screen to a Test and Debug Screen, by pressing “y”  
(sYstem) which allows you to perform system-level maintenance operations. You can back up  
the system configuration onto an external computer after saving and subsequently editing it,  
and (if necessary) you can restore that configuration to the system (refer to the backup and  
restore section later in this chapter). You also can erase the system configuration and restart  
the system with a single “zip” command.  
3.9.1 Test, Debug, Backup & Restore  
Advanced configuration and diagnostics are available through the use of the sYs (sYstem)  
command from the System Main Screen. Pressing “y” brings up the Test and Debug screen  
System Operation  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
System Level Maintenance  
Figure 3-13.System Test and Debug Screen  
3-20  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration and Operation  
3.9.2 Debugging the System  
System Level Maintenance  
The D (Debug) command is only available to factory personnel with a password authorization  
higher than "Superuser." It gives access to the system software coding.  
3.9.3 Backing up the System Configuration Data  
The IMACS-200 provides the capability to backup the system configuration to a PC or  
network service device. This information will be contained in a file, and can be used to restore  
the data to the same unit should it ever need to be re-installed, or to use the configuration as a  
base file to place into other boxes with the same configuration to save time on installation.  
There are two options for backup and restore, as seen in figure Figure 3-14. TFTP and  
xmodem file transfer protocols are employed on the box.  
Figure 3-14.Backup (and restore) File Transfer Protocols  
3.9.4 Pre-TFTP Backup and Restore Preparation  
To perform backup and restore uploads/downloads via the TFTP function, the following  
method of connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) network must first be selected.  
1. The first option requires that the system to which you will download be powered and  
running through an active ethernet port that is connected to a LAN. The connection must  
be made either in the box that will receive the downloaded or in a remote box routed  
through the local IMACS-200 that is set as a gateway using IP protocol. You must be able  
to ping the IMACS-200 IP address from the PC or server that you intend to use as a TFTP  
server and vice versa. Setting up the host IP address, netmask and gateway are done at the  
sYstem level, and then editing the parameters in the tcp/Ip screen as shown in figure  
Figure 3-15 on page 3-22. The Host IP State must be set to the active status, and the Host  
System Operation  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
System Level Maintenance  
I P and netmask parameters must be set. You may need to change the routing table on your  
PC to include the IMACS-200 ethernet address as the gateway, or the local host address  
as the gateway for the system receiving the file as the destination IP address,  
Figure 3-15.Setting the Host IP address  
Note: Your PC must have some sort of TFTP or TFTPD server software installed and  
running when you are downloading the binary files to the system. If you are using  
TFTPD type software it is easier if you set the root directory to indicate where the  
binary file is located at the TFTPD root screen. This eliminates the need to enter a  
path at the file name screen during the download process. If you are running a TFTP  
software package, consult the user guide accompanying the software for details on  
configuring and using the software.  
3.9.5 TFTP Backup for 1.x.x  
Follow the instructions listed below to perform a TFTP backup.  
1. Log into the Integrated Access System using the Manager Password.  
2. Press “Y” for System at the main menu.  
3. At the Test and Debug screen press “B” for Backup.  
4. The NV Ram Backup screen will appear. If the Protocol selected is xmodem, press Enter.  
You will be shown the option of tftp on the bottom of the screen. Use the right or left arrow  
key to move to tftp, and press Enter.  
3-22  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Configuration and Operation  
System Level Maintenance  
5. Press “G” for Go - an NV image overwrite command confirmation appears. Enter “Y”  
for yes.  
6. Confirmation appears when the NV Ram flash backup is complete. Press Enter as  
prompted on the screen.  
7. TFTP backup is now ready to proceed. Select TFTP by highlighting the appropriate  
protocol using the arrow keys. Press Enter when TFTP is highlighted.  
8. Press “G” for Go.  
9. A series of four questions must be answered to complete the backup process. The  
questions are as follows:  
The system asks for the desired number of mismatch retries. Enter an appropriate number  
between 1-40, with 20 as default. Press Enter.  
The system asks for the desired number of Timeout Retries. Enter an appropriate number  
between 1-10, with 4 as default. Press Enter.  
Next, the system requires the IP address of the PC or TFTP server to which the backup  
will be sent. Following entry of the IP address press the Return key to continue.  
Finally, the system requires entry of the filename for the backup being performed.  
Following entry of a filename the backup process begins. A TFTP backup complete  
message appears when the process finishes.  
Finally, the system requires entry of the filename for the backup being performed.  
Following entry of a filename the backup process begins. A TFTP backup complete  
message appears when the process finishes.  
3.9.6 TFTP Restore for 1.x.x  
Follow the instructions listed below to perform a TFTP restore.  
Note: Restore actions may be denied, based on several factors. Should the database  
being restored not be an IMACS 200 database, or if it comes from a higher  
release then is currently running on the IMACS 200, or if the checksum of the  
file does not match the calculated value, then user will be presented with a  
message indicating 'Invalid NV flash image'.  
1. At the main menu press “Y” for System.  
2. Press “E” for Restore at the Test and Debug menu.  
System Operation  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
System Level Maintenance  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Protocol selection and press Enter.  
4. Select TFTP and press Enter.  
5. You will receive an NV Ram image overwrite confirmation message. Press “Y” for yes.  
6. Enter the desired number of Mismatch retries and press Enter.  
7. Enter the desired number of Timeout Retries and press Enter.  
8. Enter the IP address of the PC or TFTP server and press Enter.  
9. Enter the filename for the backup you wish to restore and press Enter. Restoration begins.  
10. Following completion of the restoration process, the system will prompt to restore data  
with the image that was uploaded. Press “Y” for yes.  
11. The system asks to reboot. Press “Y” for yes. The system reboots and configuration  
becomes active.  
3.9.7 XMODEM Backup  
Follow the steps listed below to perform an XMODEM backup.  
1. Log into the Integrated Access System on which the backup is to be performed.  
2. Press “Y” for System at the main menu.  
3. When the Test and Debug screen appears, press “B” for Backup.  
4. If the selection currently indicates TFTP, then press Enter.  
5. Select xmodem using the arrow keys and press Enter.  
6. Press “G” for Go. A confirmation appears upon completion of the NV Ram backup to  
flash. Press Enter as prompted on the screen.  
7. Prior to starting the backup or restore process, ensure that have the PC emulation package  
is set to the XMODEM type format, otherwise an error will occur during the process.  
XMODEM backup is now ready to proceed.  
8. From the terminal screen select “Receive File” from the appropriate file menu. The  
system prompts for a backup storage directory and filename. Following entry of the  
appropriate information, backup begins. With most terminal emulation software (i.e.,  
Hyperterminal, ProCom, or Smartcom) a status window will appear during the backup  
process.  
3-24  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration and Operation  
Time Slot Assignment  
9. A system backup completion message appears and the system then prompts you to press  
Enter to continue. The backup is now complete.  
3.9.8 XMODEM Restore  
Follow the steps listed below to perform an XMODEM restore.  
Note: Restore actions may be denied, based on several factors. Should the database  
being restored not be an IMACS 200 database, or if it comes from a higher  
release then is currently running on the IMACS 200, or if the checksum of the  
file does not match the calculated value, then user will be presented with a  
message indicating 'Invalid NV flash image'.  
1. Log into the Integrated Access System to be restored.  
2. To restore a previous backup access the main menu. Press “Y” for System.  
3. Press “E” for Restore at the Test and Debug screen.  
4. If the selected Protocol indicates TFTP, then press Enter.  
5. Select XMODEM transfer method and press Enter.  
6. Press G” for Go to begin restore.  
7. From the terminal emulation window select “Send File”. Enter the correct location and  
filename of the backup to be restored and press Enter. Restoration should begin and a  
progress monitor screen will appear.  
8. Upon completion of the restoration, the system prompts whether or not to restore the NV  
Ram image, select “Y” for Yes.  
9. The system prompts whether or not to reboot. Select “Y” for Yes.  
10. Following system reboot, login as usual and proceed as appropriate.  
3.10 Time Slot Assignment  
This section provides instructions for assigning DS0 time slots to the voice and data ports of  
the IMACS-200. It also provides time slot cross-connection setup instructions.  
System Operation  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Assigning Time Slots  
The IMACS-200 maximizes the use of incoming and outgoing T1 lines. You can do this by  
assigning specific channels, or DS0 time slots, to voice and data ports in the system. You also  
can cross-connect time slots between T1WAN ports of the system.  
The WAN port allows you to connect one DS0 time slot to another. Throughout this chapter,  
these connections are called "pass-through" circuits because they link a time slot from one T1  
line to another through the system. You can therefore have up to four separate T1 links on two  
WAN ports, in any cross-connect combination.  
The following sections of this chapter describe several ways for you to administer your  
networks and correctly allocate transmission bandwidth to meet your needs. The next section  
deals with assigning time slots to the user voice and data port.  
The third section deals with cross-connecting WAN time slots to other WAN time slots.  
The fifth section describes signaling status, signaling, and companding conversion. The last  
section shows you how to view the time slot map after making your assignments and  
cross-connections.  
This chapter defines "assigning time slots" as the process of connecting user port ports to  
WAN ports and time slots, and it defines "cross-connecting time slots” as the process of  
connecting WAN time slots to other WAN time slots in the system.  
3.10.1 Modes of Operation  
In the 1.x.0 system, the only mode available is XCON.  
3.10.2 XCON Mode (XCON)  
The XCON mode allows the user to cross-connect DS0s to user voice or data ports or to  
cross-connect any DS0 on any WAN port to any DS0 on any other WAN port in the system.  
The “Mode” setting on a WAN in a XCON system will only indicate the XCON option.  
3.11 Assigning Time Slots  
You must use a time slot map to specify the connections between all incoming and outgoing  
lines connected to the system. The time slot map lets you split up your T1 bandwidth into  
portions required for normal voice and data communications. It contains the connections for  
all ports in your system.  
3-26  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Configuration and Operation  
Assigning Time Slots  
3.11.1 Assigning a Time Slot to a User port Port  
You can define a time slot map from any user port (data or voice) for connections involving  
that port, or from a WAN port for cross-connections involving only WAN ports. For example,  
Figure 3-16 shows the E&M port Main Screen for the time slot assignments. Assign time slots  
to a voice port as follows:  
1. From the System Main Screen, select the desired voice port and press <Enter>. That  
port’s Main Screen appears.  
2. Select the WAN port from which you want to assign time slots to the E&M port. In  
Figure 3-16, this is wan-1 (for WAN 1, port 1).  
3. Select a time slot (TS) for the first port. A number appears at the bottom of the screen  
for the corresponding time slot on the WAN port.  
4. Set the time slot number by using the up and down arrow keys to highlight it, then press  
the <Enter> key.  
5. Change the STATE of the port from stdby to actv.  
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the remaining port ports, to assign time slots to them.  
7. Press “s” to save your settings, using the Save command in the port Main Screen.  
Figure 3-16.Typical E&M port Time Slot Assignments  
System Operation  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Circuit Names  
3.11.2 Cross-Connect Model  
The Cross-connect model allows you to access one T1 links for each of two WAN ports, for a  
total of four T1 links. All WAN port connections to other WAN ports are accomplished  
through the cross-connect option on the System Main Screen, and must be individually  
specified.  
3.12 Circuit Names  
A cross-connect circuit in the IMACS-200 is formed when assigning one resource to another  
using one or more time timeslots. Resources are User, Server and WAN ports.  
When a resource is formed when assigning a user or server port to a WAN, a circuit is formed  
and given a name according to the type of circuit and type of resources assigned Table 3-3 lists  
the default circuit name assignments.  
Table 3-3. Circuit Names  
user_circuit  
net_circuit  
usr_circuit  
user port (FXS, to WAN)  
WAN port to WAN port  
DS0 port to WAN port  
Note: Not all circuits formed in the IMACS-200 system have a direct relationship with a slot  
and unit. These types of circuits are not maintained by the CNA. Circuits made  
manually from the Cross Connect screen are not be affected by other resources.  
Examples of this type of circuit are WAN-to-WAN and user circuits.  
3.12.1 Display and Change Circuit Names  
Circuits can be displayed on the Cross Connect screen by pressing the "x" key from the main  
screen as shown below.  
3-28  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Configuration and Operation  
Circuit Names  
Figure 3-17.Cross Connect Screen  
Circuits are then selected by moving the arrow keys up and down. Only network type circuits  
are shown on the first Cross Connect screen.  
To display a list of all cross connects in the IMACS-200 system from the Cross Connect  
screen, select "View All". Below is a sample of this screen.Note that this is page one of two.  
Using the ‘d’ for pageDown and ‘u’ for pageUp will display more pages.The rename circuit  
screens following will be on page 2 of 2.  
Figure 3-18.Cross Connect Screen -View All  
Renaming Circuits  
For the renaming feature, it does not matter which side of the circuit is selected, only the line  
at which the original circuit is printed matters.  
After hitting the 'n' key on the View All screen, circuits can be rename by hitting 'Enter' as  
shown in the following figure.  
System Operation  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Circuit Names  
Figure 3-19.Cross Connect Circuit (Rename)  
Hitting "S" to save the circuit name changes the name of the circuit as shown in the below  
figure:  
Figure 3-20.Cross Connect Rename Circuit (Saving)  
3.12.2 Backup and Restore Circuit Name Table  
The circuit name table can be backed up and restored via VNVRAM, adding additional  
flexibility for managing circuit names.  
When TFTP is used or NVRAM is backed up to FLASH, entire NVRAM is saved, including  
the circuit name table.  
3-30  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Configuration and Operation  
Circuit Names  
Figure 3-21.NVRAM Backup Screen  
When NVRAM is restored via TFTP or from FLASH, the entire image is transferred including  
the circuit name table. The circuit name table shown as Xcon Names has been added to the  
selections to allow ascii restore as shown in the figure below.  
Figure 3-22.NVRAM Restore Screen  
Upon restoring the Xcon Names table, changed circuit names will be restored into NVRAM  
for recognition whenever the resource using it is next changed.  
To change a circuit name permanently using NBR, change the circuit name in both the Xcon  
Names and the Xcon Names selections. Changing the names in the Xcon table alone will only  
preserve the name until next time the resource holding it is changed.  
System Operation  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
Cross-Connecting WAN Time Slots System Configuration and Operation  
3.13 Cross-Connecting WAN Time Slots  
After assigning the user ports to DS0 time slots, you can also assign the remaining WAN time  
slots for pass-through cross-connections betweenT1 links.  
You can cross-connect WAN time slots from the System Main Screen. To perform  
cross-connections, press “x” in that screen to invoke the Xcon command. The Cross-Connect  
Screen in Figure 3-23 appears. In the cross-connect screen, type “a” to add a cross-connect  
circuit. The Add command provides the fields used to program all of the "pass-through"  
circuits in the network (See Figure 3-24). Table 3-4 lists the circuit parameters and their  
options and default settings.  
Figure 3-23.Cross-Connect Screen  
Figure 3-24.Add a Cross-Connect Circuit Screen  
3-32  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Configuration and Operation Cross-Connecting WAN Time Slots  
Table 3-4. Time Slot Cross-Connection Options and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
CIRCUIT ID  
Any combination of letters or numbers up to 14 characters, including **************  
spaces  
W/U  
TS/BW  
W/U  
TS/BW  
SIG/TC  
wan-1 wan-2 wan-3 wan-4  
table  
wan-1 wan-2 wan-3 wan-4  
table  
wan-1  
00  
wan-1  
00  
CIRCUIT ID  
A circuit is defined as a group of one or more DS0 time slots cross-connected from one WAN  
link to another. Each circuit can carry either voice or data traffic, and needs its own name to  
facilitate cross-connect management within the system. The Circuit ID field allows you to  
name individual pass-through circuits. The factory-default ID is "new circuit.” However, you  
can change the ID to show any relevant title for the pass-through connection, although each  
circuit ID must be unique. This ID can contain up to 14 numbers, letters (uppercase and  
lowercase), and spaces, in any combination. Figure 3-25 shows an example of a new circuit,  
which is named E911 to PoPo.  
System Operation  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
Cross-Connecting WAN Time Slots System Configuration and Operation  
WARNING!  
When cross-connecting multiple independent data DS0 time slots (sequentially grouped time  
slots should work) for data. Super-rate [data type cross-connect] is multiple DS0s sequentially  
assigned between WAN aggregates in a cross-connect system. DO NOT attempt to save time  
by cross-connecting independent data time slots as one super-rate circuit (could cause data  
errors.) This limitation does not apply to voice time slots.  
Figure 3-25.New Circuit Selection and ID Assignment  
W/U  
The first WAN Unit (W/U) column is the T1 link in which the pass-through connection begins  
(since these circuits are bi-directional, the concept of beginning or ending is used for  
illustrative purposes only). The options are all WAN ports and ports, and the identification  
uses the same convention (wan-1, wan-2, etc.) seen earlier. If a WAN port is not present in  
the W/U selected, an error message is generated.  
3-34  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration and Operation Cross-Connecting WAN Time Slots  
The example in Figure 3-26 shows wan-1 as the selected WAN port.  
Figure 3-26.WAN Unit Options  
TS/BW  
The first Time Slot/Bandwidth column shows the different time slots of wan-1 that will be  
assigned to this pass-through connection. Figure 3-27 shows the selection of time slots 8 to  
time slot 12 of wan-1 assigned to the start of the connection. Any number of time slots from  
1 to 24 is allowed for T1 transmission.  
System Operation  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
Cross-Connecting WAN Time Slots System Configuration and Operation  
Make your selection by using the space bar and arrow keys. The arrow key moves from slot  
to slot, and the space bar toggles between selecting and deselecting a time slot.  
Figure 3-27.Time Slot and Bandwidth Options  
W/U  
The second WAN Unit column is the T1 link in which the pass-through connection ends. The  
options are all of the WAN ports and ports. If a WAN port is not present in the W/U selected,  
an error message is generated. Figure 3-26 shows the selection of W 1-3.  
TS/BW  
The second Time Slot/Band Width column shows the different time slots from WAN 1-3 that  
will be assigned to this pass-through connection. Figure 3-27 shows the selection of 5 time  
slots from WAN 1-3 assigned to the end of the connection. Any number of time slots from  
1-24 would be accepted for T1 operation. The bandwidth is automatically assigned.  
Make your selection with the space bar and arrow keys. The arrow key moves from slot to slot,  
and the space bar toggles between selecting and deselecting the time slot. The number of DS0  
time slots assigned to this half of the cross-connect circuit must equal the number assigned to  
the other. Otherwise, the system will reject the connections and generate an error message.  
Users dealing with a voice cross-connect circuit (with or without signaling) can access  
capabilities from the WAN cross-connect screen. See the review at the end of this section.  
3-36  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration and Operation Cross-Connecting WAN Time Slots  
SIG/TC  
You can define a pattern to be transmitted on a cross-connected circuit if one of the circuit’s  
two WAN links fails on a WAN to WAN cross-connect. This is known as Trunk Conditioning  
(TC), and can be assigned for the transport channels. For circuits that terminate locally in the  
IMACS-200, the field is populated as n/a, for not applicable.  
The SIG/TC choices are shown in Figure 3-28. The off option turns off all trunk conditioning  
and signaling off for the selected circuit, creating a clear-channel path. The other available  
options will enable robbed-bit signaling for the cross-connected circuit: user (user-defined bit  
pattern), e&m (trunk signaling), fxsl (foreign exchange station-loop-start), fxsg (foreign  
exchange station ground-start), fxsd (foreign exchange station-defined network), plar  
(private-line automatic ringdown), dpo (dial-pulse originating), fxol (foreign exchange office  
loop-start), fxog (foreign exchange office ground-start), fxod (foreign exchange  
office-defined network), dpt (dial-pulse terminating) and mrd (manual ringdown). The screen  
below has been modified to display all the possible options.  
Figure 3-28.Supported Signaling Trunk Conditioning Types  
System Operation  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
Cross-Connecting WAN Time Slots System Configuration and Operation  
If you choose user, also enter a two-digit hexadecimal code for the bit pattern to be sent in each  
direction. Each digit can be from 0 to 9 or a to f. Figure 3-29 shows a typical signaling bit  
pattern entry screen.  
Figure 3-29.Options with choosing User Trunk Conditioning  
Once a service has been selected on the SIG/TC screen, you will then need to select the idle  
or busy pattern to send on a CGA event. On the example shown below in Figure 3-30, for the  
timeslots chosen for WAN-3 and WAN-4 connection, a busy signal will be sent to the DS0  
identified on WAN-4 should WAN-3 fail, and conversely an idle pattern will be sent should  
WAN-4 fail.  
Figure 3-30.Pattern to be sent on WAN failure  
3-38  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Configuration and Operation  
Cross-Connect Actions  
3.14 Cross-Connect Actions  
Figure 3-5 summarizes the actions you can perform from the Cross-Connect Screen. These  
actions appear at the bottom highlighted line of the screen.  
Table 3-5. Cross-Connect Screen Actions  
Action  
Add  
Function  
Allows you to program additional pass-through cross-connects in the system. If  
mistakes are made during the add process, pressing the up arrow or down arrow  
key will terminate this operation.  
uPdate  
dElete  
pgUp  
Initiated by pressing the "p" key. With this command, users can change any of the  
parameters of a pass-through connection. Use the arrow keys to highlight the area  
to be changed and close the transaction using the "s" (Save) command.  
Initiated by pressing the "e" key. Use this command to delete existing  
pass-through connections. The system will prompt users to delete the circuit, and  
the "y" key must be pressed to complete the transaction.  
Initiated by pressing the "u" key. Since the system can handle many different  
cross-connect circuits, users may exceed a single screen. New pages will be  
added automatically to accommodate additional circuits. The page count feature  
at the top of the screen shows the current page and the total amount of  
cross-connect pages. Use this command to scroll up through the pages of  
cross-connect information.  
pgDn  
Initiated by pressing the "d" key. This action is similar to the pgUp command.  
Use this command to scroll down through the pages of cross-connect information.  
View all or The View all action is initiated by pressing the "v" key. T  
View net  
Main  
Return to the Main IMACS-200 screen.  
System Operation  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Cross-Connect Actions  
To update a cross-connected circuit from the Cross-Connect Screen, highlight the circuit name  
to be updated, and press “p” to invoke the uPdate command. Figure 3-26 shows the WAN port  
1-3 and TS (time slots) 6 through 8 being updated. However if the WANs are selected and  
deleted as shown in Figure 3-31 then the screen in Figure 3-27 will be blank for WAN TS 6  
through 8.  
To delete a cross-connected circuit from the Cross-Connect Screen, highlight the circuit name  
to be deleted, and press “e” to invoke the dElete command. Figure 3-31 shows the deletion  
process.  
Figure 3-31.Delete Cross-Connection Screen  
3-40  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Configuration and OperationRecording the Time Slot Configuration  
3.15 Recording the Time Slot Configuration  
After setting up the initial system configuration and define the time slot map, record this  
information on paper. Recording the initial configuration in a logical manner will help if you  
have a problem later.  
Record the information in a way that makes sense to you and will be easy for others to  
understand. Also be sure to note the initial settings for each port in copies of the T1 operation  
tables provided in Table 3-6. Store all initial configuration information in a safe place where  
anyone needing to service the system can easily find it.  
Table 3-6. Time Slot Recording Form for T1 Operation  
WAN Port No. _______ - _______  
TS Number  
port Type  
Port Number  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
3.16 Power Supply Redundancy  
Each power supply component runs in a load-sharing mode, if your IMACS-200 is so  
equipped. Should one of the supplies fail, the backup unit will automatically take over all the  
power needs of the IMACS-200. Also, the defective unit will create a system alarm upon  
failure, to alert an operator. Similarly, if the crafts person should disconnect one of the power  
System Operation  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
System Configuration and Operation  
Power Supply Redundancy  
feeds into the IMACS-200, the power supply fail alarm will be raised. Both the AC and DC  
versions of the IMACS-200 can have backup power feeds and supplies, if so ordered. Upon  
failure, the ALARM LED on the faceplate of the IMACS-200 will be turned on and a system  
alarm will be generated.  
3-42  
System Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Introduction  
Chapter 4  
IMACS-200 General Features  
4.1 Introduction  
The main login level of the IMACS-200 is the highest level and allows access to Alarms and  
alarm filtering, overall cross-connect information, and access to backup and restore functions.  
4.2 CPU Descriptions  
The main CPU level is accessed as soon as a user logs into the IMACS-200. This main screen  
is seen in figure Figure 4-1.  
Figure 4-1.Main CPU level upon login  
To enter into the CPU level to begin setting up the ethernet port and the other features  
described in this chapter, simply press enter. The screen in Figure 4-2 will then appear.  
General Features  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU User Screens and Settings  
4.3 CPU User Screens and Settings  
The IMACS-200 main CPU has several user interface screens for port configuration and  
network status viewing purposes. These screens are described in the remainder of this chapter.  
4.3.1 CPU Main Screen  
Figure 4-2 shows the CPU interface Main Screen. You must configure the CPU interface after  
logging into the system for the first time. To view this screen, highlight the CPU line in the  
Main Screen and press <Enter>.  
Figure 4-2.CPU Main Screen  
The CPU has numerous settings that you must configure. The CPU Main Screen displays the  
node name, the system location and contact prime, the alarm settings and the host software  
version currently installed active. The settings are described in the next few sections of this  
chapter.  
The bottom highlighted line of the above screen shows a series of actions you can perform in  
this menu. To perform an action, press the letter key associated with the uppercase letter of the  
desired action. For example, to save your port option settings after making them, press “s” to  
invoke the Save command. Table 4-1 lists and describes these actions.  
4-2  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU User Screens and Settings  
Table 4-1. CPU Main Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., performance and test data).  
tcp/Ip  
Allows the user to configure for TCP/IP functionality.  
usrNames Allows additions to user names, groups, password administration.  
Clock  
Allows the user to set the IMACS-200 timing parameters, time of and date,  
ACO activity  
Main  
Returns you to the System Main Screen. If you made changes to any port  
settings but did not save them yet, you will be prompted to save or lose those  
changes before exiting.  
4.3.2 User Names, Passwords and Groups  
You may want to change your system access passwords frequently, in order to maintain  
optimum security on your network. The recommended passwords are a minimum of 6 and no  
more than 12 characters in length, are not found in a dictionary, and contain both letters and  
numbers. Because the system is case-sensitive for password entries, you can mix uppercase  
and lowercase letters to provide more possible passwords.  
The user administration function is activated by entering ‘n’ for usrNames from the CPU Main  
screen, as shown in Figure 4-2 on page 4-2.  
Note: The passwords MUST be at least six characters long and MUST be a combination of  
characters and at least one digit!  
The system supports 256 possible users. Each user is defined by the use of three entries or  
fields. The fields are editable by a user who has Administrator or Superuser access. Following  
is a brief description to the user fields:  
Table 4-2. User Access Table  
User Name  
Password  
User Group  
An Alpha-numeric string  
consisting of 6 to 12  
An Alpha-numeric string  
consisting of 6 to 12  
A number from 1 to 32.  
characters. Duplicate user characters.  
names are not allowed,  
i.e. all 256 user names  
must be unique.  
General Features  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU User Screens and Settings  
When the system is first commissioned, there is only one group defined:  
Table 4-3. Default User Table  
Default Password  
Default User Name  
admin  
Default User Group  
admin  
1
Each user group represents a different access level that allows a login id to perform system  
certain tasks after logging in.  
4.3.2.1 User Groups  
The User Group that is assigned to a user defines the access level that he or she has to various  
system functions. The following example shows a portion of a user group provisioning table.  
The system allows for 32 such user groups:  
Table 4-4. User Accesses by Group  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
1
(Superuser)  
N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R  
or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW  
2
N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R  
or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW  
3
N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R  
or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW  
4
N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R  
or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW  
n
n
32  
N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R  
or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW  
N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R N or R  
or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW or RW  
4-4  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU User Screens and Settings  
When the system is first commissioned, or after a ZIP function, the user group defaults to the  
following configuration:  
Table 4-5. Default Group Permissions  
RW  
R
RW  
R
RW  
R
RW  
R
RW  
R
RW  
R
RW  
R
RW  
R
1
2 - 32  
User group 1 is the "Superuser" and its attributes are not provisionable. User groups 2 to 32  
default to R in all attributes. They can have any one of 3 possible values entered into the  
various cells of the user group table:  
N = None. When "N" is entered in a section of the user group definition, users with that  
group have no access to that part of the system, including its UI  
R = Read Only. When “R” is entered in a section of the user group definition, users with  
that group have read (or view) access to that part of the system, including its UI. However,  
they can not make any changes or edits.  
RW = Read/Write access (full access). When "RW" is entered in a section of the user  
group definition, users with that group have read, write, and edit access to that part of the  
system, including its UI  
WARNING!It should be noted that users with the ability to Administer  
Users will be able create new accounts with read/write access to ALL  
categories. Care should be exercised in providing access to the  
Administer Users function.  
To change a password, first log into the system under a user who has the RW capability  
assigned to Administer Users, or the admin level. Enter the CPU level, as shown in Figure 4-2  
on page 4-2. Enter N for userNames, and a screen such as Figure 4-3 appears.  
General Features  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU User Screens and Settings  
Figure 4-3.User Name Screen  
Table 4-6 shows the valid actions that a user can perform when at the user name field.  
4-6  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU User Screens and Settings  
Table 4-6. usrName Screen Actions  
Action  
Function  
Refresh  
Add  
Del  
Re-paints the current screen  
Allows you to add a user  
Allows you to delete a user  
Group  
Displays the Group settings and access level permissions as explained in  
Login Log Provides the last 20 login and logout events.  
pgup  
pgdn  
Main  
Pages up  
Pages down.  
Returns you to the CPU Main Screen. If you made changes to any port  
settings but did not save them yet, you will be prompted to save or lose those  
changes before exiting.  
Refresh  
Selecting ‘R’ for refresh will renew the data presented on the screen.  
Add  
To add a user, choose the A function. Use carriage returns to update a field, and arrow keys to  
move around in the screen. For Figure 4-4 below, the administrator chose Add, carriage return,  
typed in “Pastel” and return, right arrow, return, typed “flood01” and carriage return,  
confirmed the password by typing in “flood01” a second time and carriage return, right arrow  
to the group field, carriage return and then used the up arrow until ‘06’ appeared and hit  
carriage return. Don’t forget to save your changes!  
Figure 4-4.Adding a User  
General Features  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU User Screens and Settings  
Del  
Selecting the ‘E’ delete function will allow the user to delete the user that the cursor is  
currently positioned upon.  
Group  
Selecting ‘G’ will show the permissions for access to a Superuser that can be changed. These  
are outlined in Section 4.3.3 on page 9.  
Login Log  
Selecting ‘L’ will take the user to a screen where the login log is stored. This table is read-only,  
and will display the last twenty login and logout events.Figure 4-5 shows how a typical entry  
will appear.  
Figure 4-5.Login Log Sample Display  
pgUp  
Selecting the ‘U’ function will cause the screen to page up, if applicable.  
pgDn  
Selecting the ‘D’ function will cause the screen to page down, if applicable.  
Main  
Selecting the ‘M’ function will return the user back one level to the CPU Main Screen.  
4-8  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU User Screens and Settings  
4.3.3 Access Level Permissions  
With the Admin level user, the Group setting can be changed on a group basis. Begin by  
accessing the User Name Screen as shown in Figure 4-3 on page 4-6. Select the Group option  
by typing “G”, and a screen such as in Figure 4-6 appears  
Figure 4-6.Group Permissions Settings  
Use the arrow keys to select the field and permission that you want to change, and access the  
write capability by issuing a carriage return. The user can then set the access level to None,  
Read only or Read Write (W) as desired. Following is the description of the Access Levels,  
and what can be done in each.  
WAN Provisioning  
This covers all provisioning screens and activities associated with both the copper and optical  
WAN interfaces.  
WAN Alarms  
This covers all alarm reporting screens and activities associated with both the copper and  
optical WAN interfaces. Read access allows alarms to be viewed only. RW access allows  
changes to severity, thresholds etc. (any provisionable alarm attributes)  
WAN PMs  
This covers all performance monitoring screens and activities associated with both the copper  
and optical WAN interfaces. Read access allows PMs to be viewed only. RW access allows  
changes to intervals, thresholds etc. (any provisionable PM attributes)  
General Features  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Other CPU Settings  
Access Provisioning  
This covers all provisioning screens and activities associated with all the access interfaces.  
This includes OHSU, HSU, SRU, voice, alarm, and Ethernet posts  
Access Alarms  
This covers all alarm reporting screens and activities associated with all the access interfaces.  
This includes OHSU, HSU, SRU, voice, alarm, and Ethernet posts. Read access allows alarms  
to be viewed only. RW access allows changes to severity, thresholds etc. (any provisionable  
alarm attributes)  
Access PMs  
This covers all performance monitoring screens and activities associated with OHSU, HSU,  
SRU, voice, alarm, and Ethernet interfaces. Read access allows PMs to be viewed only. RW  
access allows changes to intervals, thresholds etc. (any provisionable PM attributes)  
Administer System  
This covers system level activities such as IP addresses, inventory, software upgrade, data  
base backup, setting the real time clock, setting sync sources etc.  
Administer Users  
This covers the provisioning and administration of users and user groups. Read access allows  
user names and user group attributes to be viewed but not changed. RW access allows you to  
edit user names, passwords, and user group attributes. It also allows you to disable all users  
(ref. R-5.6.3.4 #5). You can never view passwords, even with RW access (ref R-5.6.3.1 #2).  
Users, once logged in, can always change their own password regardless of the attribute of this  
field in their user's group.  
4.4 Other CPU Settings  
You also must set the additional port parameters described below in the CPU Main Screen.  
Most of these are user-defined alphanumeric entries. To make new entries in these fields, first  
press <Enter> to highlight the current entry in the lower left of the screen. Then, type the new  
data on the keyboard. If you make a mistake, press either the backspace or <Delete> key to  
back up the cursor and erase the incorrect characters. Then, retype the correct characters.  
Finally, press <Enter> again to store the new entry in the field.  
4-10  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IMACS-200 General Features  
Other CPU Settings  
Figure 4-7.Other CPU Fields and Settings  
Refer to Figure 4-7 for the following field definitions and their meanings.  
NODE ID  
In this field, enter a 14-character node name for the Integrated Access System. This entry must  
be unique for each system in your network. It can have alphanumeric characters and spaces.  
SUPERUSER  
This field displays the current password for Superuser SNMP access. Only the Superuser  
should see this field. This password level gives special access for maintenance and  
diagnostics, to be used under the direction of a qualified technician.  
MANAGER  
This field displays the current password for Manager SNMP access. Only the Superuser and  
the Manager should see this field. This password level gives full access to all configuration  
options, diagnostic tests and password control.  
OPERATOR  
This field displays the current password for Operator SNMP access. The Superuser, Manager  
and the Operator should see this field. This password level gives read / write access to  
configuration options and diagnostic features.  
General Features  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Other CPU Settings  
VIEWER  
This field displays the current password for Viewer SNMP access. All users can see this field.  
This password level gives read only access to configuration options and diagnostic features.  
SYS CONT  
In this field, enter the name of a person to contact for questions about the Integrated Access  
System. This field can have up to 23 alphanumeric characters, including spaces. For  
convenience, use the system administrator’s name in this field.  
SYS LOC  
In this field, specify the location of the Integrated Access System. This field can have up to 23  
alphanumeric characters, including spaces.  
SYS PH#  
This field allows for the operator to enter the phone number where the unit resides, if  
applicable.  
ALRM SEQ  
The Alarm Sequence setting establishes how the sequence number for alarms is generated. Set  
this option to all if you want any alarm generated by the system to be assigned a sequence  
number. Or, set this field to report if you want only the alarms set to report to have sequence  
numbers.  
ACO TYPE  
The Alarm Cutoff (ACO) option reports a status to you based on the latch (condition held) or  
cur (current condition) setting.  
WAN TYPE  
This field displays the type of WAN interface, either T1 or E1.  
OWAN TYPE  
This field displays the type of OWAN interface, either T1 or E1.  
4-12  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Other CPU Settings  
FCR  
Fast Circuit Restore. This field can be set to on or off, the default is off. When set to off,  
normal T1 recovery modes are in effect. When set to on, the services will restore as soon as  
the facility becomes available for service. Selecting to on will typically recover data services  
in 200 ms, and voice services after one second.  
HW Rev.  
This display-only field will indicate the revision of the hardware, and is used for some  
hardware/software compatibility control.  
Serial No  
This read-only field displays the unique serial number programmed in the unit.  
Software Version  
This read-only field is updated with the latest version of software currently active on the unit.  
Model  
This read-only field displays the model information purchased, and should match the  
information in the Ordering Guide, Table 1 in the Product Description Chapter at the  
beginning of this manual.  
General Features  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Other CPU Settings  
4.4.1 System Clock Source  
Figure 4-8.Setting the System Clock Source  
The IMACS-200 can be set to source to an incoming timing source from the WAN, the HSU,  
the optional OWAN, or on its internal clock. Figure 4-8 shows this setting from the CPU Clock  
screen. Choosing one of the three choices and saving the choice will force the system to time  
off of that source.  
The crafts person can choose a different source for both the Primary and Secondary inputs,  
and the current clock field will update to the highest-order clock available. The primary clock  
is always the systems first choice, followed by the Secondary clock and then finally the shelf  
will internally time. For example, should the primary timing source fail, the system will  
automatically switch to the secondary source. Should the primary timing source recover, then  
the system will automatically switch back to the primary timing source. Should both the  
primary and secondary sources fail, then the IMACS-200 will revert to internally timed. Loss  
of the secondary timing source while the primary source is still available will have no impact  
to the system operation.  
4-14  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
Other CPU Settings  
4.4.2 Setting the System Time  
Figure 4-9.Setting the System Time  
From the Clock level of the CPU, the user can set the date and time as shown in Figure 4-9.  
From this same level, the crafts person can execute the Alarm Cut Off (ACO).  
General Features  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
SNMP Network Management  
4.5 SNMP Network Management  
SNMP access allows users to remotely gather information, provision, test and monitor the  
IMACS 200. This section presents this type of Network Management System (NMS) for  
diagnosing and reporting trouble at unsupervised locations. The SNMP alarm traps and  
configuration can connect using this alternate method. Both formats can use either the SA4 on  
an E1 link, or a full DS0 on a T1 or E1 link.  
If you do not understand the NMS concepts of IP addressing, SNMP, TELNET, and Ping,  
please consult with your network administrator before attempting to install or repair  
components presented in this section.  
The first step in starting an operator session is to log into the system. You must enter a  
password that allows you to perform the required tasks on the system. The initial (default)  
SNMP Default Passwords / Community Names correspond to four different access levels,  
each allowing you to perform certain tasks. Table 4-7 lists the default passwords and describes  
the access levels.  
Table 4-7. SNMP Users and Default Passwords  
Default  
Password and  
Community  
Name  
Access Level  
Description  
Special access for maintenance and  
diagnostics, to be used under the direction  
of a qualified technician. Reserved for  
internal use only,  
superuser  
*********  
Full access to all configuration options,  
diagnostic tests and password control.  
manager  
operator  
viewer  
Manager  
Operator  
Viewer  
Read/Write access to configuration and  
diagnostic features.  
Read-only access to configuration and  
diagnostic features.  
The “Superuser” password is the highest level of access, followed by “Manager”, “Operator”,  
and “Viewer” in sequence. Each level allows you to also perform all operations available to  
the other levels below it. For example, if you log in under the “Operator” password, you can  
configure the system and perform diagnostic tests, or you can simply view the current system  
status and configuration data, which are the only tasks permitted under the “Viewer”  
password.  
All passwords are case-sensitive for maximum security. For example, the system handles  
TechMan, TECHMAN, and Techman as three different passwords.  
4-16  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
SNMP Network Management  
You can change your Manager, Operator, and Viewer passwords at any time. See your system  
administrator to change your password or access levels.  
A user who has read/write access to the Administer System system function (see Table 4-4 on  
page 4-4) will have the ability to see and update all of the Passwords / Community Names used  
for SNMP access. Users who have the Administer Users system function (see Table 4-4 on  
page 4-4) will be able to view the Passwords / Community Names for Manager, Operator and  
Viewer but will not be able to change or update them.  
General Features  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
TCP/IP Network Management  
4.6 TCP/IP Network Management  
Using IP addresses, you can communicate directly with the affected system, diagnose the  
problem, and dispatch a technician if necessary.  
Figure 4-10shows the TCP/IP Screen. To access this screen, press “I” (tcp/Ip) in the CPU  
Card Main Screen. Table 4-8 summarizes the actions that can be performed from this screen,  
and Table 4-9 lists the TCP/IP Screen parameters and options.  
Figure 4-10.Typical TCP/IP Screen  
4-18  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
TCP/IP Network Management  
Table 4-8. TCP/IP Screen Actions  
Action  
Ping  
Function  
Test whether the connected device responds to an echo request message.  
After entering the IP address of the host device, the status line will display,  
"Testing . . ." The next message indicates if the host is alive or down.  
Displays the Network Statistics. See below.  
Shows the Routing screen. See the “Routing” section below.  
Saves changes to settings.  
Netstat  
rOute  
Save  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Used on Testing and Monitoring screens to update statistics, and on other  
screens to redraw the screen.  
Main  
Returns to the CPU card main screen. If changes are made to settings and  
not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
Table 4-9. TCP/IP Screen Options and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
stdby  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
host  
HOST IP STATE  
HOST IP ADDR  
HOST NETMASK  
HOST TYPE  
actv stdby  
IP address  
Network  
host gateway  
DEFAULT IP TYPE  
none  
SA4  
local ether wan  
ipr-fr  
local ether  
DEFAULT IP SLOT  
DEFAULT IP TS  
n/a wan-1 wan-2 wan-3 wan-4)  
n/a table  
n/a  
n/a  
DEFAULT GATEWAY  
RPT1 IP ADDR  
RPT1 COMMUN STR  
RPT2 IP ADDR  
RPT2 COMMUN STR  
RPT3 IP ADDR  
RPT3 COMMUN STR  
IP address  
IP address  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
blank  
0.0.0.0  
blank  
0.0.0.0  
blank  
IP address  
IP address  
HOST TYPE  
The Host Type is used to control IP forwarding. When Host Type is set to gateway, IP  
datagrams are allowed being forwarded. When Host Type is set to host, no forwarding is  
allowed. For IP forwarding (routing) to work correctly, a route must be created in the routing  
table.  
DEFAULT IP TYPE  
The Default IP Port setting, tells the IMACS 200 where IP packets will be sent when there is  
no matching entry in the routing table. The options are none (no default route used), local  
ethernet (SLIP/PPP over DB-9 serial port), wan (wan-1, wan-2, wan-3, wan-4), ipr-fr (IP  
Router via Frame Relay) or SA4 (use of the 4kbps channel available for E1 customers).  
General Features  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
TCP/IP Network Management  
DEFAULT IP SLOT  
The Default IP Slot options are determined by the choice of Default IP Port. If none, local  
ether or ipr-fr is selected for that parameter, this option will show n/a. If wan or sa4 is  
selected, the options for this parameter will show wan-1 through wan-4(the WAN card slot  
that transmits and receives NMS information).  
DEFAULT IP TS  
The Default IP Unit options are determined by the choice of Default IP Slot. If none, local  
ether, ipr-fr or sa4 is selected for that parameter, this option will show n/a. If wan is selected  
above, the options for this parameter will be table, and the user will need to define the  
appropriate time slots to be used. (corresponding with the WAN port).  
DEFAULT GATEWAY  
The Default Gateway is used to control IP forwarding. IP datagrams are allowed being  
forwarded to the assigned IP address.  
RPT1 IP ADDR  
The RPT1 IP Address is the IP address of the first Network Management System host running  
an SNMP trap server.  
RPT1 COMMUN STR  
The RPT1 Community String holds the community string for the first NMS host running a  
SNMP trap server. The community string provides additional security by rejecting messages  
that do not contain the correct string. There must be some entry in this field to enable RPT1.  
RPT2 IP ADDR  
The RPT2 IP Address is the IP address of the second Network Management System host  
running a SNMP trap server.  
RPT2 COMMUN STR  
The RPT2 Community String holds the community string for the second NMS host running a  
SNMP trap server. The community string provides additional security by rejecting messages  
that do not contain the correct string. There must be some entry in this field to enable RPT2.  
4-20  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
RPT3 IP ADDR  
The RPT3 IP Address is the IP address of the third Network Management System host running  
an SNMP trap server.  
RPT3 COMMUN STR  
The RPT3 Community String holds the community string for the third NMS host running a  
SNMP trap server. The community string provides additional security by rejecting messages  
that do not contain the correct string. There must be an entry in this field to enable RPT3.  
4.7 Remote Administration  
The Ethernet port allows the user to telnet into the IMACS-200 and allows for remote  
management, configuration and downloading of host code via a 10baseT Ethernet port.  
4.7.1 Setting Up Remote Connectivity  
Before using the remote Ethernet port, the crafts person must perform the following steps:  
1. From the CPU Main screen in Figure 4-2, enter ‘I’ for tcp/Ip, as seen in figure Figure 4-11.  
Figure 4-11.Setting up Remote Connectivity  
2. Leave the HOST IP STATE as stdby for now.  
3. Enter in the HOST IP ADDRESS: [device IP address]  
General Features  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
4. Enter in the HOST NETMASK: [IP mask]  
5. Select the HOST TYPE as either host or gateway. As a host system, the IMACS-200  
terminates the IP when packets are destined for its address. As a gateway, the IMACS-200  
has the ability to perform packet-forwarding to another destination.When choosing the  
gateway option, the user can only select WAN as the Default IP type. Figure 4-12  
illustrates the ability of the IMACS-200 to perform this daisy-chaining function in the IP  
cloud.  
Figure 4-12.IP Daisy-chaining on the IMACS-200  
6. Select the DEFAULT IP TYPE as either none, local ethernet or wan  
a. If wan is chosen, then the IP SLOT and IP TS will be accessible to the user. If this is  
the case, datafill these fields with the WAN and timeslot where the Ethernet port will  
be carried. Use of these fields will provide timeslots to the IMACS-200. Otherwise,  
these fields will be n/a by default. Performing this action will set up port SCC3 as seen  
in Figure 4-13, which enables the upstream management channel.  
Figure 4-13.Displaying the SCC ports  
4-22  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
b. Choosing Host type as gateway will set up the downstream management channel, or  
SCC4. The IP static route must be set via the rOute option after you have saved the  
above. To set up a static route, choose the rOute option from the tcp/Ip screen and  
choose the add option, stepping through the required fields as shown in Figure 4-14.  
This route will setup the SCC4 connection for the forwarded IP packets. The IP net  
and SubNetMask indicate which packets will be forwarded.  
Figure 4-14.Setting up a Static IP Route on the IMACS-200  
7. Enter in the DEFAULT GATEWAY:[IP address]  
8. Save the specified settings.  
a. If using remote connectivity via WAN from an IMACS 800 or IMACS 200 acting as  
a gateway, enter the IP route (option O).  
b. If using remote connectivity from an IMACS MCC card, before pinging any of the  
daisy-chained nodes you must inform your IP network of the route via the route  
command. For example (using Figure 4-12 on page 4-22 as the network diagram), you  
will need to add the following routes to your IP host:  
route add 10.1.2.2 10.1.1.2  
route add 10.1.2.3 10.1.1.2  
route add 10.1.2.4 10.1.1.2  
route add 10.1.2.5 10.1.1.2  
9. Go back up to the HOST I P STATE in step 2 and change it to actv  
10. Save the specified settings.  
11. From a PC on the same IP network, enter:  
a. Ping [device IP address]  
General Features  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
b. Telnet [device IP address]  
12. From the IMACS-200:  
a. Ping PC on IP network  
13. From a PC on a different network than the IP network:  
a. Ping [device IP address]  
b. Telnet [device IP address]  
14. From the IAD, Ping PC on the network different from IP subnetwork.  
4.7.2 Network Statistics Screens  
The Network Statistics Screens provide maintenance and diagnostic information for the  
different protocols supported by this equipment. The system starts accumulating statistics  
when the TCP/IP Port is changed from off to local or wan, and it continues to store  
information until it is turned off.  
Figure 4-15 shows the first of eight Network Statistics Screens, and Figure 4-15throughFigure  
4-17show the other three screens. To go to the first screen, press “n” in the TCP/IP Screen to  
choose Netstat from the bottom line of that screen. Table 4-10 lists the actions that can be  
taken from the Network Statistics Screens, and the following paragraphs describe the  
parameters in each screen.  
Figure 4-15.Typical Network Statistics Screen, Page 1  
4-24  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
To move from one screen (page) to another, press “d” (pgDn) or “u” (pgUp). Pressing “d”  
goes to the next-highest page number. If you are on Page 4 when you press “d”, you will wrap  
around to Page 1. Page 4 is currently not used on the IMACS-200, and therefore present not  
data. Pressing “u” goes to the next-lowest page number. If you are on Page 1 when you press  
u”, you will wrap around to Page 4.  
General Features  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
Table 4-10. Network Statistics Screen Actions  
Action  
pgUp  
Function  
Scrolls backward through network statistics, one page at a time. If you are  
on the first screen (Page 1), automatically “wraps around” back to the fourth  
screen (Page 4).  
pgDn  
Scrolls forward through network statistics, one page at a time. If you are on  
Page 4, automatically “wraps around” back to Page 1.  
Refresh  
Main  
Since the system does not update statistics automatically, the Refresh  
command must be used to update information in statistics fields.  
Returns to the TCP/IP Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
4.7.2.1 IP Parameters  
The IP parameters appear in the first Network Statistics Screen (Figure 4-15). These are  
described below.  
Default TTL  
The Default TTL field shows the Time To Live for information packets from transmission to  
delivery. The TTL for this system is 255 seconds.  
Datagrams Received  
The Datagrams Received field shows the number of IP datagrams (packets) received by the  
local system from the network host.  
Datagrams Disported  
The Datagrams Disported field shows the number of datagrams that were disported by the  
local system.  
Datagrams Delivered Above  
The Datagrams Delivered Above field shows the number of datagrams sent to the TCP layer  
of the network host to the local system.  
Datagrams From Above  
The Datagrams From Above field shows the number of information or traps sent by the local  
system to the UDP or TCP layer of the network host.  
4-26  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
Datagrams Sent  
The Datagrams Sent field shows the total number of datagrams sent by the local system to the  
network host.  
TX Disported - RAM  
The TX Disported - RAM field shows the total number of datagrams sent by the local system  
that were disported due to lack of free RAM memory.  
TX Disported - Mailbox Short  
The TX Disported - mailbox short field shows the total number of datagrams aborted by the  
local system because of a mail subsystem overflow.  
TX Disported - Other  
The TX Disported - other field shows the total number of datagrams disported due to other  
causes.  
General Features  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
4.7.2.2 TCP State Parameters  
The TCP state parameters appear in the third Network Statistics Screen (Figure 4-16). They  
are described below.  
Figure 4-16.Typical Network Statistics Screen, Page 2  
Packets Received  
The Packets Received field shows the number of TCP packets received by the local system  
from the network host.  
Packets Disported - Checksum  
The Packets Disported - Checksum field shows the number of TCP packets that were  
disported by the local system because the checksum failed.  
Packets Disported - Port  
The Packets Disported - Port field shows the number of TCP packets that were disported by  
the local system because the port assignment was incorrect.  
Packets Disported - Window  
The Packets Disported - Window field shows the number of TCP packets that were disported  
by the local system because the window data was incorrect.  
4-28  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
Bytes Delivered Above  
The Bytes Delivered Above field shows the number of information or traps sent from TCP  
layer of the network host to the local system.  
Bytes From Above  
The Bytes From Above field shows the number of information or traps sent to the TCP layer  
of the network host from the local system.  
Packets Sent  
The Packets Sent field shows the total number of TCP packets that were transmitted to the  
network host by the local system.  
ACKs Received  
The ACKS Received field shows the total number of acknowledgments that were received by  
the local system from the network host.  
Packets Sent - Reset  
The Packets Sent - reset field shows the total number of TCP packets that were transmitted by  
the network host to the local system.  
Packets Sent- ACK  
The Packets Sent - ACK field shows the total number of TCP acknowledgment packets that  
were transmitted by the network host to the local system.  
Packets Retransmitted  
The Packets Retransmitted field shows the total number of TCP packets that were  
retransmitted by the local system to the network host.  
RTT Increased  
The RTT Increased field shows the number of times the retransmission time-out was increased  
because the system was busy.  
General Features  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
RTT Decreased  
The RTT Decreased field shows the number of times the retransmission time-out was  
decreased because the system was not busy.  
Connections Opened  
The Connections Opened field shows the total number of connections that were opened by the  
local system to the network host.  
Connections Closed  
The Connections Closed field shows the total number of connections that were closed by the  
local system to the network host.  
Connections Aborted  
The Connections Aborted field shows the number of times the connection was aborted  
because either the number of consecutive retransmissions was equal to 10 or retransmission  
time-out was equal to 15 minutes.  
Packets TX Aborted - RAM  
The Packets TX Aborted - RAM field shows the total number of packets sent by the local  
system which were aborted because of the lack of free RAM memory.  
4-30  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
4.7.2.3 UDP Parameters  
The UDP parameters appear in the fourth Network Statistics Screen (Figure 4-17). They are  
described below.  
Figure 4-17.Typical Network Statistics Screen, Page 3  
Packets From Above  
The Packets From Above field shows the number of UDP packets sent by the local system to  
the network host.  
Packets Sent  
The Packets Sent field shows the number of UDP packets transmitted from the local system  
to the network host.  
General Features  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
4.7.2.4 TELNET Parameters  
The TELNET parameters also appear in the fourth Network Statistics Screen (Figure 4-17).  
They are described below.  
Bytes Received  
The Bytes Received field shows the total number of bytes that were received by the local  
system from the network host.  
Bytes Receive as Commands  
The Bytes Received as Commands field shows the total number of bytes that were received  
as commands by the local network from the network host.  
Bytes Delivered Above  
The Bytes Delivered Above field shows the total number of bytes that were transmitted by the  
network host to the local system.  
Bytes Replied as Commands  
The Bytes Replied as Commands field shows the total number of bytes that were transmitted  
as commands by the local system to the network host.  
Bytes From Above  
The Bytes From Above field shows the total number of bytes that were received by the  
network host from the local system.  
Bytes Sent  
The Bytes Sent field shows the total number of bytes that were transmitted by the local system  
to the network host.  
Sessions Opened  
The Sessions Opened field shows the total number of sessions that were opened by the local  
system with the network host.  
4-32  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
Sessions Closed  
The Sessions Closed field shows the total number of sessions that were closed by the local  
system with the network host.  
TX Wait for Buffer  
The TX Wait for Buffer field shows the total number of transmissions that were delayed by  
the local system for free memory in the buffer.  
4.7.2.5 SNMP Parameters  
The TELNET parameters also appear in the fourth Network Statistics Screen (Figure 4-17).  
They are described below.  
PDUs Sent  
The PDUs Sent field shows the number of Protocol Data Units sent from the local system. A  
Protocol Data Unit is a data object exchanged by protocol drivers, usually containing both  
protocol control information and user data.  
Traps Sent  
The Traps Sent field shows the total number of SNMP traps that were transmitted by the local  
system to the network host.  
General Features  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
4.7.2.6 SCC Parameters  
The SCC parameters for ports C1 through C4 appear in the fourth through seventh Network  
Statistics Screen (Figure 4-18). They are described below.  
Figure 4-18.SCC Port Parameters  
In Packets  
The In Packets field shows the number of packets received by the local system.  
In Octets  
The In Octets field shows the number of bytes received by the local system.  
In Discards  
The In Discards field shows the number of packets received by the local system which were  
unable to be processed and therefore discarded. This is likely due to an over-messaging or  
resource issue.  
In Unknown Protos  
The In Unknown Protos field shows the number of packets received by the local system which  
are of an unknown protocol.  
In Errors  
4-34  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
The In Errors field shows the number of packets received by the local system which had errors  
and were discarded as faulty.  
Out Packets  
The Out Packets field shows the number of packets sent by the local system.  
Out Octets  
The Out Octets field shows the number of bytes sent by the local system.  
Out Discards  
The Out Discards field shows the number of packets sent by the local system which were  
unable to be processed and therefore discarded. This is likely due to an over-messaging or  
resource issue.  
Out Errors  
The Out Errors field shows the number of packets sent by the local system which had errors  
and were discarded as faulty.  
General Features  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Remote Administration  
4.7.2.7 SA4 Parameters  
The SA4 parameters appear in the eigth Network Statistics Screen (Figure 4-19). They are  
described below.  
Figure 4-19.SA4 Bit Parameters  
In Packets  
The In Packets field shows the number of packets received by the local system.  
In Octets  
The In Octets field shows the number of bytes received by the local system.  
In Discards  
The In Discards field shows the number of packets received by the local system which were  
unable to be processed and therefore discarded. This is likely due to an over-messaging or  
resource issue.  
In Unknown Protos  
The In Unknown Protos field shows the number of packets received by the local system which  
are of an unknown protocol.  
4-36  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
Host Software Upgrade Procedure  
In Errors  
The In Errors field shows the number of packets received by the local system which had errors  
and were discarded as faulty.  
Out Packets  
The Out Packets field shows the number of packets sent by the local system.  
Out Octets  
The Out Octets field shows the number of bytes sent by the local system.  
Out Discards  
The Out Discards field shows the number of packets sent by the local system which were  
unable to be processed and therefore discarded. This is likely due to an over-messaging or  
resource issue.  
Out Errors  
The Out Errors field shows the number of packets sent by the local system which had errors  
and were discarded as faulty.  
4.8 Host Software Upgrade Procedure  
This section provides procedures for upgrading Integrated Access System host software. The  
procedures for upgrading from 1.0.0 to the next release.  
The host software is stored in flash memory facilitating download of future software releases  
to the IMACS-200.  
The preferred upgrade method is using tftp protocol. The estimated time to upgrade an  
IMACS-200 with xmodem is 1.5 hours, whereas upgrading the unit with tftp takes  
approximately 5 minutes.  
4.8.1 Equipment Requirements  
Following are the equipment requirements for host software upgrade.  
IMACS-200 equipped with latest host software  
Laptop computer running Windows OS  
Serial port cable to connect to the TERM port on the Integrated Access System  
The next available Host software on disk or loaded into laptop computer  
General Features  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Host Software Upgrade Procedure  
4.8.2 Laptop Setup  
Follow the steps listed below to set up the laptop computer.  
1. Boot the laptop.  
2. Click START”.  
3. Select Programs”, “Accessories, and click on “HyperTerminal”.  
4. In the HyperTerminal window, double click on “Hypertrm” icon.  
5. In the New Connection window, Enter Name: enter Upgrade.  
6. Select icon and click OK.  
7. In Connect to Window, Connect Using, click down arrow and select “Direct to COM1”.  
8. Click OK.  
9. In COM 1 window, set BITs per second to “9600” (leave other settings as is) click OK.  
10. In Upgrade window, click File menu, select Properties, and select Settings.  
11. In Emulation window, select VT100 and click Terminal Setup.  
12. Select 132 column mode, click OK.  
13. Close Properties window and save.  
14. Right click on Upgrade Icon and select Create Shortcut.  
15. Drag shortcut to the desktop.  
4.8.2.1 Log Upgrade Activity  
Create a log to record upgrade activity on a per-site basis that includes the following  
information:  
Site name, date and time, and name of technician performing upgrade  
System name(s) and number of ports per system  
Model, serial number, and host version  
Model, serial number, and host version  
4-38  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMACS-200 General Features  
4.8.3 Upgrade Preparation  
Software Download Procedures  
Follow the steps listed below to perform an upgrade.  
1. Connect the laptop to the TERM port on the Integrated Access System.  
2. Press Enter, and log into the system.  
3. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to CPU and press Enter.  
4. Verify and record the current host software version.  
4.9 Software Download Procedures  
4.9.1 XMODEM Protocol Binary Download  
Note: Using XMODEM to upgrade the IMACS-200 will take approximately one and a half  
hours. Where possible, tftp upgrades should be employed.  
Follow the steps listed below to perform an XMODEM protocol bin download.  
1. Set up a direct connection to the VT-100 craft port.  
2. Locally connect the PC to the VT-100 craft port. Log into the system with Administer  
System access.  
3. Highlight CPU and press “P”.  
4. The binary buffer area appears, and one of the buffers displays in an active state. The other  
buffer may be empty or may have a file in it.  
5. If both buffers have files in them, highlight the buffer that is not active. Press the Enter  
key and four options appear at the bottom of the screen. Using the arrow keys, highlight  
the erase parameter and press Enter. When the system finishes erasing the buffer it will  
indicate an empty state.  
6. Using the arrow keys, highlight the empty buffer area and press Enter. Four parameters  
will appear on the screen. Using the arrow keys, select the dnload (download) parameter  
and press Enter. Two parameters will appear at the bottom of the screen.  
7. Using the arrow keys, select the XMODEM parameter and press Enter. The letter “C” will  
begin duplicating across the screen. This is normal and does not indicate a problem.  
General Features  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Software Download Procedures  
8. At the HyperTerminal screen, select file transfer and send the file. Choose the appropriate  
binary file to download using the XMODEM protocol to BIN buffer 1 or 2, depending  
upon which bin is empty.  
9. Following completion of the download process, make the newly loaded bin active and  
then erase the existing firmware from the now inactive bin. Perform the download process  
again so that both buffers have the same firmware applied to them.  
4.9.2 Pre-TFTP Binary Upload/Download Preparation  
To perform binary (bin) uploads/downloads via the TFTP function, one of the following two  
methods of connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) network must first be selected.  
The first option requires that the system to which you will download be powered. The  
connection must be made either in the box that will receive the downloaded file or in a remote  
box routed through the local CPU that is set as a gateway using an IP protocol. You must be  
able to ping the IMACS-200 and the local and remote CPU host IP addresses from the PC or  
server that you intend to use as a TFTP server and vice versa. You may need to change the  
routing table on your PC to include the IMACS-200 ethernet address as the gateway, or the  
local host address as the gateway for the system receiving the file as the destination IP address.  
Note: Your PC must have some sort of TFTP server software installed and running when you  
are downloading the binary files to the system. If you are using TFTPD type software  
it is easier if you set the root directory to indicate where the binary file is located at  
the TFTPD root screen. This eliminates the need to enter a path at the file name screen  
during the download process. If you are running a TFTP software package, consult  
the user guide accompanying the software for details on configuring and using the  
software.  
4.9.3 Loading the Software Image Using the Ethernet Port  
Follow the steps listed below to perform an software download and activate new firmware on  
the CPU. It may be helpful to backup the device configuration before activating the  
downloaded software. Activating software resets the CPU and initializes the IMACS-200.  
1. Using a Telnet session over the Ethernet port, establish a connection to the desired IAD.  
To setup the Ethernet port, see “Setting Up Remote Connectivity” on page 21.  
4-40  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IMACS-200 General Features  
Software Download Procedures  
Note: When upgrading from a PC, an ethernet cross-over cable will be required. Use the  
TCPIP settings to put your PC on a network connection (such as 192.0.0.1), and set  
the IMACS-200 on the same subnet (such as 192.0.0.2).  
2. At the Login screen, enter the system password.  
The Main screen appears.  
3. With the cursor on the CPU level, press P.  
The Flash screen appears with status and data for memory blocks 1 and 2.  
Figure 4-20.Flash Screen  
4. Select the block to be replaced or updated. Press Enter.  
The Flash screen appears with the software download commands at the bottom of the  
screen.  
General Features  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Software Download Procedures  
Figure 4-21.Flash Screen with Commands  
5. Select the desired command. Press Enter.  
The activate, download, and erase cannot be performed on the active software.  
6. Enter Y to replace the current software.  
The system removes the current software from the selected block.  
7. Select the tftp option. Press Enter.  
8. Enter the desired number of mismatch retries. Press Enter.  
Default value is 20.  
9. Enter the desired number of timeout retries. Press Enter.  
Default value is 4. The Flash Screen appears with the software removed from the selected  
bin.  
4-42  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IMACS-200 General Features  
Software Download Procedures  
Figure 4-22.Flash Screen with Software Removed  
10. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server. Press Enter.  
11. Enter the firmware filename. Press Enter.  
The download software appears in the Flash screen.  
Figure 4-23.Flash Screen with Downloaded Software  
12. With the desired software block selected, press Enter.  
The activate and deactivate options appear at the bottom of the screen.  
13. Verify the checksum value for the software load to ensure a successful download.  
Checksum values appear in the product release notes. Even for the same software load,  
the checksum values differ for each software block.  
14. Select Activate and press Enter.  
General Features  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
Software Download Procedures  
This resets the IMACS-200 and makes the selected software the current active load.  
Upon reset and activation, you will lose the current Telnet connection.  
4-44  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU Error Messages  
4.10 CPU Error Messages  
Refer to Appendix B in this Guide for further information on Error Messages regarding this  
port.  
4.11 CPU Troubleshooting  
On power-up, the IMACS-200 performs a self-test. This is the only diagnostic available for  
the first release of the unit. A “healthy” active IMACS-200 will have a green LED lit on the  
front panel.  
The indications that a IMACS-200 is not on-line are:  
Continuous amber alarm LED on front panel or the LEDs continually cycling through the  
orange, green, red, blank sequence.  
Inability to communicate with the system by any means (VT-100 Term, Telnet, etc.).  
If the IMACS-200 is determined to be faulty, replace it and return the faulty unit for repair to  
the location specified by your distributor.  
General Features  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IMACS-200 General Features  
CPU Troubleshooting  
4-46  
General Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WAN ports  
Introduction  
Chapter 5  
WAN ports  
5.1 Introduction  
This chapter provides configuration and troubleshooting information for the Wide-Area  
Network (WAN) ports. There are four WAN ports available on the IMACS-200.  
The WAN ports manage the flow of data through the IMACS-200 network. They terminate  
T1or E1 lines and generate or receive network timing clocks. They also cross-connect DS0  
time slots, to pass data through the system from one T1or E1 line to another.  
5.2 WAN port Descriptions  
The WAN ports are used for connection to a 1.544 Mbps T1 network, or to a 2.048 Mbps E1  
network. There are four ports available on the IMACS-200, ports numbered wan-1, wan-2,  
wan-3 and wan-4. Connection to the WAN ports are made through the rear panel of the  
IMACS-200, labeled T1/E1 and numbered 1 through 4. The access to these ports is via four  
separate RJ45 connectors. Refer to Section Table 2-6. on page 10 of the System Installation  
chapter for pinouts of the WAN connections.  
WAN Ports  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
5.3 WAN port User Screens and Settings  
5.3.1 WAN Settings for T1 and E1  
Table 5-1 shows the WAN port Main Screen for T1 operation.  
Figure 5-1.WAN T1 Port Main Screen  
Table 5-2 shows the WAN port Main Screen for E1 Operation.  
Figure 5-2.WAN E1 Port Main Screen  
5-2  
WAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
Table 6-1 summarizes the actions you can perform from this screen, and Table 6-2 lists the  
settings controlled on the screen along with their possible and default values.  
Table 5-1. WAN Screen Actions  
Action  
Function  
Save  
Undo  
Saves changes to settings.  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., performance and test data).  
Xcon  
Perf  
Displays the connections for the selected WAN port.  
Brings up the Performance Data Screen. See the Performance Data section of  
this chapter.  
Farstat Shows the far-end network register data.  
Test  
Initiates and monitors testing of all WAN port ports. Refer to the Test section  
of this chapter.  
Main  
Returns to the System Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or abandon your changes.  
Table 5-2. WAN Screen Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Notes  
Default  
STATE  
stdby actv  
d4 esf  
ami b8zs hdb3  
crc d-frm  
cas ccs nos  
norm inv  
stdby  
esf  
b8zs or hdb3  
FORMAT  
LINE CODE  
FRAME  
1
2
2
2
1
TS16  
EVEN BIT  
LINE LEN  
LINE LB  
110 220 330 440 550 660 0DB 7.5DB 15DB 22.5DB  
off on  
110  
off  
LOCAL LB  
LB GEN  
LB DET  
EER THRHD  
COM/NMS RP  
off on  
off llb plb nlb  
w/to off on  
10e-4 through 10e-9 none  
none e-sa4  
off  
off  
w/to  
10e-4  
none  
1
1
2
Notes: 1 is used to indicate a T1 field only, 2 indicates E1 only  
STATE  
In the standby state, the WAN port is electrically disconnected from the external network. Set  
State setting to stdby (standby) when setting up your WAN links, then changes it to actv  
(active) when starting normal operations.If the WAN is in loopback due to a command from  
a remote device, the loopback will be dropped if you switch to stdby.  
WAN Ports  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
FORMAT  
The Frame setting toggles the frame format to be used on the T1 WAN link so that it matches  
the frame format used by the T1 carrier. Set the format Parameter based on the type of frame  
format the T1 carrier requires. The options are d4 (normal superframe) or esf (extended  
superframe).  
LINE CODE  
The Line Code setting matches the Line code used by the T1 interface to that used by the T1  
network. Set the Line Code to the type of Line Code used. The options are ami and b8zs for  
T1. For E1, the options are ami and hdb3.  
FRAME  
The Frame setting toggles the frame type from crc (Cyclic Redundancy Check, 4th level) to  
d-frm (Double Frame) in the E1 mode only.  
TS16  
The TS 16 setting is used in the E1 mode only, and changes the signaling usage of slot 16 for  
cas (Channel Associated Signaling), ccs (Common Channel Signaling) or nos (No Signaling).  
In the first two options, time slot 16 is used to carry signaling information for all channels on  
the E1. If nos is selected, then time slot 16 becomes available for user data.  
EVEN BIT  
The Even Bit parameter is used in E1 mode only, and the option for inv will cause the system  
to invert every even bit in every DS0 time slot. This setting should only be used if the entire  
E1 stream is composed of PCM voice, to ensure minimum-ones density.  
LINE LEN  
The Line Length setting adjusts the T1 power level to compensate for the distance the signal  
must travel before it reaches the first T1 line repeater or other device. For the DS1 interface,  
the options are 110, 220, 330, 440, 550, and 660 feet or 0, 7.5, 15, and 22.5 dB.  
5-4  
WAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
LINE LB  
The Line Loopback setting loops the T1 line back towards the network, as shown in Figure  
5-3. This loopback also continues sending the incoming data toward the CPE. Choosing on  
allows you to test the end-to-end T1 circuit path from the far end. Choosing off disables the  
loopback and restores the normal signal path in both directions. If the WAN is in loopback due  
to a remote device, the loopback will be dropped if you choose on.  
Figure 5-3.Line Loopback  
LOCAL LB  
The Local Loopback setting allows you to loop the full T1 line back toward the CPE, as shown  
in Figure 5-4. This loopback also continues sending CPE data towards the network. Choosing  
on allows you to test the local system. Choosing off disables the loopback and restores the  
normal signal path in both directions. If the WAN is in loopback due to a command from a  
remote device, the loopback will be dropped if you choose on  
Figure 5-4.Local Loopback  
WAN Ports  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
LB GEN  
The Loopback Generate setting (available only in esf format) generates out-band diagnostic  
codes that are sent to the remote equipment. These codes are compatible with DDS networks  
and allow you to command a latching loopback at remote DDS equipment. The options are  
off, llb (Line Loopback), plb (Payload Loopback) and nlb (Network Loopback).  
Selecting off generates a loopback deactivate command corresponding to the last activation  
command generated. e.g. if you send a plb command and then send an off command, the off  
command would be payload deactivate. Note that the actual transmission of the command  
happens after you press ‘s’ for Save. If you have already sent one of the loopback activation  
commands, it is recommended that you send an off command before sending another loopback  
activation command. e.g. this set of selections plb, off, llb, off transmits the following  
commands: payload activate, payload deactivate, line activate, and line deactivate.  
LB DET  
This option allows the card (available only in esf format) to detect DS1 channel, and ANSI  
T1.403 loopbacks. When set to off, no T1 loopbacks can be detected. When set to on, T1  
Loopbacks will be detected and maintained until a loop down is detected. The with/time-out  
(w/to) is the same as on except that if no loop down is detected after ten minutes, the loopback  
will self-terminate. If the WAN is in loopback due to a command from a remote device, the  
loopback will be dropped if you choose off.  
EER THRHD  
The Excessive Error Rate Threshold selects the error rate, which an alarm is declared. This  
setting interacts with the EER setting in the Alarm Filters of your system. The options are  
10e-4 through 10e-9, or none.  
COM/NMS RP  
The Communications/Network Management System Report setting (available for E1  
customer only) tells the system where to send TCP/IP packets from the NMS configuration  
selected. The options are none (no NMS), or e-sa4 (send NMS information in a proprietary  
ESF format via the SA4 channel to an NTU).  
5-6  
WAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
5.3.2 Cross-Connect (XCON)  
For looking at DS0 utilization on a per WAN port basis, the xcon option is included. Simply  
place your cursor on a WAN port of your choosing, and hit the ‘x’ key. A figure similar to  
Figure 5-5 will appear.  
Figure 5-5.WAN Cross-Connect Per Port  
The WAN xcon screen allows the crafts person to quickly see where the connections are on  
each of the four WAN ports. For naming changes, and editing connections, the Cross-Connect  
(Xcon) command in the Main screen level allows you to view and add the time slot or DS0  
assignments that have been set up in the system. This screen offers a centralized place for  
managing the cross-connects on the IMACS-200. From the main IMACS-200 screen, press  
‘X’ for the Xcon option. This screen will display to the user all the of the WAN to WAN  
cross-connections that have been made on the IMACS-200. New connections can be added by  
selecting the Add function as shown in Figure 5-6, and using the arrow keys to select and  
update the various fields. To see all of the connections made on the IMACS-200, the user can  
type ‘V’ for ‘View All”. A display such as is shown in Figure 5-7 will appear. This screen can  
also be used to initiate changes in the WAN to WAN cross-connects, as well as changing the  
names of Voice circuits. Time slot and cross-connect configuration are discussed in the System  
Operations chapter of this manual.  
WAN Ports  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
Figure 5-6.Adding a WAN to WAN Cross-connect  
Figure 5-7.T1 Cross-Connect Screen (display only)  
5-8  
WAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
5.3.3 Performance Data  
All WAN ports gather performance data. The performance data for a T1 line is viewed by  
typing “p” in the WAN port Main Screen, to invoke the Perf command. Performance data is  
accumulated for 15-minute increments that include the current period and the previous 96  
periods (24 hours), which are accessed via the pgUp and pgDn commands of the Main Screen.  
Performance data can be viewed for each WAN port by moving to that port and then selecting  
the “p” option.  
In an T1 environment, an error is defined as any CRC-4 error, Controlled Slip, or OOF error.  
Figure 5-8 shows a typical T1 Performance Data Screen. The performance statistics are  
gathered and displayed in 15-minute intervals. Lines in each of the columns represent periods  
when no seconds have accumulated.  
In the AT&T mode, two sets of registers accumulate performance data for 4 WAN links. The  
user registers and network registers are driven by the same errored events. However, they can  
be cleared separately. You can view both the user and network registers, but you can only clear  
the user registers. The network only has access to the network registers, and can only clear  
those registers. The ANSI and T1 WAN links have only one set of registers.  
Figure 5-8.Typical Performance Data Screen  
Table 6-3 lists the actions available from the Performance Data Screen.  
Table 5-3. Performance Data Screen Actions  
Action  
Refresh  
Function  
Because statistics are not calculated in real time, the Refresh command  
must be used to update the screen with new information.  
Pages through the performance statistics for the current 15 minute period  
and periods 96-1.  
Pages through the performance statistics for the current 15 minute period  
and periods 1-96.  
pgUp  
pgDn  
WAN Ports  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
uSerregs  
Allows you to view the User Registers. Not shown for T1 operations  
because it is the only set of registers for that mode.  
Networkregs  
Allows you to view the Network Registers. When you are viewing the  
network registers, the Clear Registers option disappears. (This action is  
not available in D4 mode or T1 operations.)  
Clearregs  
Main  
Clears the User Registers. Network statistics remain the same.  
Returns to the WAN port Main Screen.  
ES  
An Errored Second (ES) is a second with one or more CRC-6 (ESF), or CRC-4 (T1) errors,  
one or more Out-Of-Frame (OOF) errors, or one or more Controlled Slips.  
UAS  
An Unavailable Second (UAS) is any second during which service is unavailable. An  
unavailable signal state is declared after ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SESs) are  
logged. An unavailable state is cleared after ten consecutive non-Severely Errored Seconds  
are logged. Unavailable Seconds are also accumulated if the port has an out-of-service (OOS)  
condition.  
SES  
A Severely Errored Second (SES) is any second with 320 or more CRC-6 (T1 ESF), or CRC-4  
(T1) errors. Or, an SES can be any second with one or more Out-Of-Frame (OOF) errors.  
BES  
A Bursty Errored Second (BES) is any second with more than one and fewer than 320 CRC-6  
(ESF), or CRC-4 (T1) errors.  
LOFC  
The Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) is the number of times a Loss Of Frame (LOF) is declared.  
An LOF is declared after 2.5 seconds of a continuous Loss Of Synchronization (LOS) or  
Out-Of-Frame (OOF) condition. The LOF is cleared after no more than 15 consecutive  
seconds without another LOS or OOF.  
SLIP  
A Slipped Second is any second that contains one or more Controlled Slips. A Controlled Slip  
is the deletion or replication of a T1 frame by the receiving equipment.  
5-10  
WAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
DM  
A Degraded Minute (DM) is any minute during the reporting period that has an error rate  
greater than 10-6 as described in ITU-T G.821. The count for this field is from 1 to 15, rather  
than 1 to 900 for the other fields.  
STATUS  
If one of the described errors occurs during any of the 15-minute intervals, the status column  
for that period would display the code for that error. The codes are displayed at the bottom of  
the screen. The values are Y (Yellow Alarm received), N (No Signal), T (Test Mode - line  
loopback, local loopback, payload loopback, or standby), L (Loss of Synchronization – 2 out  
of 4 frame bits in error), B (Bipolar Violation), and E (Excessive Error Rate).  
WAN Ports  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
5.3.4 Far-End Performance Data  
The Far-End Performance Data Screen is similar to the Performance Data Screen. NOTE:  
Only ANSI T1.403 mode is supported by the IMACS-200 for this feature. This option is not  
available in E1 mode. The same statistics are collected in a slightly different manner. Figure  
5-9 shows a typical display of far-end network register data for ANSI T1.403 mode. To view  
the far-end performance data, press “f” (Farstat command) in the WAN port Main Screen.  
When Farstat is selected, the far end generates one-second performance reports and sends  
them to the local system, where they are then stored.The message at the bottom of the screen  
shown in Figure 5-9 refreshes once per second as this data is gathered.  
Figure 5-9.Far-End Performance Data Screen  
Note: Asterisks (*) are displayed when performance data is unavailable.  
Press “c” (Clear command) from the bottom line of this screen to send a FDL message to the  
far end and also clear the local display. The following message will now appear:  
Ok to clear performance (y/n)?”  
Press “y” to clear the statistics, or “n” to leave the screen contents intact. To view the far-end  
information again, press “r” (restore) to send an FDL message and refresh the screen. Table  
6-4 lists the actions available from the above screen.  
Table 5-4. Far-End Performance Data Screen Actions  
Action  
Refresh  
Function  
Because data is not calculated in real time, the Refresh command must be  
used to update the screen with new information.  
5-12  
WAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
Clear  
PgUp  
Clears the Far-End Network Registers display on the local terminal.  
Pages through the performance statistics for the current 15-minute period  
and periods 96-1.  
PgDn  
Main  
Pages through the performance statistics for the current 15-minute period  
and periods 1-96.  
Returns to the WAN port Main Screen.  
ES  
An Errored Second (ES) is a second with one or more CRC-6 (ESF) or BPV (D4/D-Frame)  
errors, one or more OOFs, or one or more Controlled Slips.  
UAS  
An Unavailable Second (UAS) is any second during which service is unavailable. An  
unavailable signal state is declared after ten consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SESs) are  
logged. An unavailable state is cleared after ten consecutive non-Severely Errored Seconds  
are logged. Unavailable Seconds are also accumulated if the port has an out-of-service (OOS)  
condition.  
SES  
A Severely Errored Second (SES) is any second with 320 or more CRC-6 (ESF) or BPV  
(D4/D-Frame) errors, or one or more OOF errors.  
BES  
A Bursty Errored Second (BES) is any second with more than one and fewer than 320 CRC-6  
(ESF) or BPV (D4/D-Frame) errors.  
FE  
The Framing Error (FE) is incremented whenever an incorrect or unexpected framing bit is  
received in a one second window.  
SLIP  
A Slipped Second is any second containing one or more Controlled Slips. A Controlled Slip  
is the deletion or replication of a DS1 frame by the receiving equipment.  
WAN Ports  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
5.3.5 Test Screen  
Pressing “t” (Test command) in the WAN port Main Screen brings up the screen shown in  
Figure 5-10. From this screen, you can create test situations between WAN ports or between  
a single WAN port and data test equipment at a remote site. Table 6-5 lists the actions you can  
perform from the bottom line of this screen. Table 6-6 lists the settings controlled on this  
screen along with their possible values.  
Figure 5-10.Typical WAN port Test Screen  
Table 5-5. Test Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., performance and test data).  
Insert Err Allows you to manually insert a single bit error into the data signal. This does  
not cause a CRC error.  
Clear  
Main  
Clears the Test Screen and resets all counters to zero.  
Returns to the WAN port Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or abandon those changes.  
Table 5-6. WAN port Test Screen Options  
Parameter  
BERT  
User Options  
Notes  
Default  
off mark space 1:1 1:7 3:24 qrss  
prb11 prb15 prb20  
1
off  
SYNC  
BE  
ES  
SES  
CSES  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
5-14  
WAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
OSS  
information only–no user options  
BER  
ELAP  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
BERT  
The Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER)  
on the selected WAN port. The patterns that can be selected are off, mark (all ones), space  
(all zeros), 1:1 (0101), 1:7 (0100 0000), 3:24 (this pattern requires 3 bytes to display), qrss  
(quasi-random signal source), prb11 (pseudorandom binary sequence), prb15, and prb20.  
SYNC  
The Synchronization (SYNC) field tells you if the integrated BERT has achieved  
synchronization either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment.  
Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters.  
BE  
The Bit Error (BE) field shows the total number of bit errors logged. Since this is an  
information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters.  
ES  
The Errored Seconds (ES) field shows the total number of seconds in which any errors were  
detected. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters.  
SES  
The Severely Errored Seconds (SES) field shows the total number of seconds in which the bit  
error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). Since this is an information-only field,  
there are no user-selectable parameters.  
CSES  
The Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) field is triggered by the occurrence of ten  
consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the CSES field will increment (by  
one) for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive non-Severely Errored  
Seconds. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters.  
WAN Ports  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
WAN ports  
WAN port User Screens and Settings  
OSS  
The Out of Synchronization Seconds (OSS) field shows the number of seconds that the WAN  
BERT has been out of synchronization. Since this is an information-only field, there are no  
user-selectable parameters.  
BER  
The Bit Error Rate (BER) field shows the rate at which errors are being logged. The system  
calculates BER by dividing the number of bit errors (BE) by the total number of bits  
transmitted during the test. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable  
parameters.  
ELAP  
The Elapsed time setting shows the running tally of the total number of seconds during the  
test. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters.  
5-16  
WAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WAN ports  
WAN port Error Messages  
5.4 WAN port Error Messages  
Refer to Appendix B in this Guide for further information on Error Messages regarding this  
port.  
5.5 WAN port Troubleshooting  
The WAN port may be faulty if a CGA-Red alarm is in progress on either port of the port. This  
alarm occurs if the incoming network signal is lost, or if the WAN port is out of frame with  
that signal. To isolate the trouble, proceed as follows:  
1. See if similar alarms are also present on any other T1 or E1 lines and WAN ports in the  
system. If so, the trouble may be with the Interface port, which connects the T1 or E1  
signals from the WAN ports to the external network. If the trouble is only on one T1 or  
E1 line connected to the WAN port, continue with step 2.  
2. Perform a local T1 or E1 signal loopback toward the CPE, and see if the CGA alarm  
clears after about 10 to 30 seconds. If it does, the WAN port is good; go to step 3.  
Otherwise, go to step 4.  
3. Check the local network equipment receiver, cabling to the Interface port at the local  
system, and the far-end system or network transmitter.  
4. Move the WAN port with another WAN port., for example wan-1 to wan-3.  
5. If the WAN port is determined to be faulty, return the faulty unit for repair to the  
location specified by your distributor.  
WAN Ports  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
WAN ports  
WAN port Troubleshooting  
5-18  
WAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
FXS Ports  
6.1 Introduction  
This chapter provides connector pinout, configuration, and troubleshooting information for  
the Foreign Exchange - Station (FXS) Voice port. This port is labeled Voice. See Appendix C  
for pinouts of this connector.  
This port manages the flow of FXS voice traffic over the network. Each port encodes analog  
(voice, VF) signals to a digital bitstream at the local system for transmission over a T1  
network. It also decodes the digital signals to analog at the remote system.  
Each of the four FXS ports have two-wire interfaces that support FXS and PLAR. FXS allows  
users to connect the system to a two-way (both inbound and outbound calls) PBX trunk or a  
key system trunk. All the ports are pre-set to use the loop-start function with POTS stations  
and simple PBX trunks.  
6.2 FXS Descriptions  
6.2.1 IMACS-200-FXS Description  
The IMACS-200-FXS port has four ports and provides a 600-ohm terminating impedance on  
each port. All FXS features are supported by the IMACS-200.  
6.3 FXS User Screens and Settings  
6.3.1 FXS Main Screen  
You must configure the FXS ports for operation. This is done from the FXS Main Screen (see  
Figure 6-1). To go to that screen, highlight the desired port in the System Main Screen and  
press <Enter>. This screen shows one configuration column for each port on the IMACS-200.  
FXS Ports  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
o.  
Figure 6-1. Typical FXS port Main Screen  
The bottom highlighted line of this screen shows various actions that you can perform from  
this screen. You perform the desired action by pressing the associated uppercase letter key.  
Table 6-1 summarizes these actions. For example, after you configure the FXS port ports,  
press “s” to save your settings.  
Action  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
Save  
Undo  
Refresh  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Updates certain time-related information fields  
that are not automatically updated (i.e., test status).  
Copies the contents of the current column to the  
next column. Useful if you change a lot of entries  
in one column and wants to repeat those changes  
in subsequent columns.  
Copy  
Test  
Access is given to the test screen  
taBs  
Main  
Index into the signaling conversion screen.  
Returns to the System Main Screen. If you make  
changes to settings and do not save them, you will  
be prompted to save or lose changes.  
Table 6-1. Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults  
6-2  
FXS Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table 6-2summarizes the configuration settings for the FXS ports, along with the available  
and factory-default option settings. The parameters and settings are also described in the  
following paragraphs.  
Parameter  
STATE  
User Options  
Notes  
Default  
stdby  
stdby actv  
WAN/SRV  
none wan-1 wan-2 wan-3 wan-4 owan-1  
owan-2 owan-3 owan-4  
01-24 or 01-31  
none  
TS  
01  
MODE  
Rx TLP  
Tx TLP  
CODING  
LB  
fxs plar  
fxs  
-2.0  
2.0  
u-law  
off  
none  
off  
-9.0 dB to +3.0 dB  
-9.0 dB to +6.5 dB  
u-law a-inv  
off dgtl anlg  
none D-mW  
1
2
PATTERN  
SIG CONV  
n/a on off  
Table 6-2. Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults  
Notes:  
1. All four ports must be set to either u-law or a-inv.  
2. When a WAN or SRV port has not been selected, the default for Signal Conversion is  
n/a. Once a port has been chosen then the default is off.  
STATE  
The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not  
occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set the State setting to stdby (standby) for ports that are  
not to be used or that have not yet been configured. Set it to actv (active) for ports that are  
ready for use.  
WAN  
The WAN setting identifies the WAN or OWAN link assigned to this port. When choosing the  
type of wan, you must also select the desired port of the WAN or OWAN port for transmission  
over the T1 or E1 link.  
It is not necessary to assign all FXS ports to the same WAN or OWAN link, nor to contiguous  
time slots on a WAN or OWAN link.  
FXS Ports  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
TS  
The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is assigned. Values  
range from 1 to 24 for T1 links, and 01 to 31 for E1 links. For a display of the available time  
slots, refer to the cross-connect map for the WAN link; see Chapter 4, System Configuration  
and Operation in the System Reference Guide for information about viewing cross-connect  
maps.  
CAUTION!  
Before activating this port, verify the behavior expected by both the station equipment and  
remote central office equipment, and be sure the systems are properly configured.  
MODE  
The Mode setting should be determined by the type of equipment to which the user is  
connecting the port. Currently the only allowable option uses two-wire balanced connections.  
The fxs (Foreign Exchange Station) option allows users to connect the system to a two-way  
(both inbound and outbound calls) PBX trunk or a key system trunk. The system requires a  
ringing generator for this option.  
The plar (private line automatic ringdown) option provides point-to-point unswitched  
connections between two telephone sets. This configuration is usually not attached to an  
exchange or switch; rather it provides a “hot line” between two locations. The IMACS-200  
only supports d4-m2 version of plar, where the receiver generates ring cadence, offhook = 0  
and onhook = f.  
Rx TLP  
The Receive Transmission Level Point (TLP) setting controls the amount of gain or loss added  
to the incoming signal after it is decoded to analog. To increase the signal level, set the Rx TLP  
setting to a positive value (i.e., the larger the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the  
signal level, set the Rx TLP setting to a negative value (i.e., the more negative the number, the  
more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be  
increased to -3 dBm by setting Rx TLP to +2 dB. The Rx TLP range is -9.0 dB to +3.0 dB.  
Tx TLP  
The Transmit TLP setting controls the amount of gain or loss added to a voice signal from the  
CPE before it is encoded to digital PCM. To increase the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting  
to a negative value (i.e., the more negative the number, the more gain is added). To decrease  
6-4  
FXS Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a positive value (i.e., the more positive the number,  
the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be  
increased to -2 dBm by setting the Tx TLP to -3 dB. The Tx TLP range is -6.5 dB to +9.0 dB.  
CODING  
The Coding field sets the PCM companding (coding) method used for a port. Changing the  
coding field will apply the coding type selected to all four ports. Generally, the North  
American T1 environment uses u-law (mu-law) coding, and the European E1 envisonment  
uses a-inv. The coding default setting is defined by the type of associated WAN or OWAN  
port.  
LB  
The Loopback field lets you loop the port back toward the network and far end. The dgtl  
(digital) loopback sends the incoming digital DS0 signal back to the far end without decoding  
it. The anlg (analog) loopback sends the decoded analog signal back to the far end after  
decoding and then re-encoding it. Figure 6-2 shows the loopback options, which allow you to  
test and troubleshoot the FXS port. To disable a loopback, set this field to off.  
Figure 6-2. FXS port Loopbacks  
FXS Ports  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
PATTRN  
The Pattern field selects an outgoing test pattern for the current port. The test pattern is  
generated by the system and sent to the selected port. You can select a different pattern for  
each port. The none option disables the test pattern. The D-mW (Digital milliwatt) option  
sends a 1 kHz tone at 0.0 dBm. The setting of the Rx TLP setting affects the D-mW signal  
level.  
SIG CONV  
The Signaling Conversion parameter allows you to change the transmit ABCD signaling bits  
from CCITT (E1) to ANSI (T1) standards, and is accessd by selecting B from the taBs option  
at the bottom of the window.  
The options are off if ANSI signaling is used and on to convert transmit signaling from ANSI  
to CCITT format according to the Interface Card Conversion Table for FXS signaling. This  
setting also converts receive signaling from CCITT to ANSI. To see the options currently  
deployed on a port, Figure 6-3 shows the default settings for the conversion table. This table  
will be commonly used by all ports to which the this option is set to on.  
The C->A column describes conversion done in the downstream direction towards the  
subscriber loop, while the A->C column describes the conversion done in the upstream  
direction, normally towards the T1 interface.  
Figure 6-3.TABs Signal Conversion  
6-6  
FXS Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6.3.2 Test Screen  
The Test option facilitates testing and maintenance by allowing you to monitor and set the  
status of the analog interface leads, and to monitor or set the value of the A, B, C, and D  
signaling bits of all FXS circuits on that port. In cross-connect systems, the test option also  
allows you to apply test patterns and tones towards the user and network sides of the system.  
Figure 6-4 shows the FXS port Test Screen parameters,Table 6-3 lists some actions you can  
perform from this screen, and Table 6-4 shows the settings for each parameter.  
Figure 6-4. Typical FXS port Test Screen  
Note: The above screen shows the ABCD bits as sent by the Tx and Rx sides. The “c”  
indicated on ports 3 and 4 indicate that the bits displayed will then be run through the  
TABS conversion table as seen in Figure 6-3.  
Table 6-3. Test Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e. performance and test data).  
Main  
Returns to the FXS port Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
Table 6-4. Test Screen Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
TEST  
Tx ABCD  
off on  
mon set  
off  
mon  
FXS Ports  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
Rx ABCD  
TO USER  
TO NTWK  
mon set  
none D-mW  
none D-mW  
mon  
none  
none  
Tx ABCD  
Rx ABCD  
MODE  
TYPE  
STATUS  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
TEST  
The Test parameter shows if the port is in test mode or not. Inactive ports and ports that are  
assigned to inactive WANs will show a test status of n/a. The test status options for active  
ports are off and on.  
Tx ABCD  
The Transmit ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling  
bits being transmitted towards the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the  
transmit side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set  
will bring up a four digit field for users to input the ABCD pattern they want to transmit. Any  
four-digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting.  
Rx ABCD  
The Receive ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling  
bits being received from the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the receive  
side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring  
up a four digit field for users to input the ABCD pattern they want to receive. Any four digit  
combination of ones and zeros is acceptable.  
TO USER  
In cross-connect systems only, the To User parameter allows you to break the circuit and send  
a test tone on the user side of the system. The options for this field are none, and D-mW.  
Choose none if you do not want to inject a tone toward the CPE. In this case, the PCM signal  
received from the network is still sent to the CPE in the normal manner.  
6-8  
FXS Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO NTWK  
In cross-connect systems only, the To Network parameter allows you to break the circuit and  
send a test tone on the network side of the system. The options for this field are none, and  
D-mW. Choose none if you do not want to inject a tone toward the network. In this case, the  
PCM signal received from the CPE is still sent to the network in the normal manner.  
Tx ABCD  
The Transmit ABCD informational field shows the current values of the ABCD bits that are  
being transmitted to the network. If TX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the  
set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu  
of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here.  
Rx ABCD  
The Receive ABCD informational field shows the current values of the ABCD signaling bits  
that are received from the network. If RX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via  
the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the  
Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here.  
MODE  
The Mode informational field shows the current mode of the port that was selected on the main  
FXS port Screen. Valid settings are fxs.  
TYPE  
The Type informational field shows the current status of the signal field selected on the main  
FXS port screen for this port. Valid settings for fxs and wink modes is loop (loop start).  
STATUS  
The Status field shows the current status of the port. Table 6-5 lists and describes all of the  
possible conditions reported by this field.  
Table 6-5. Status Information Field Settings  
Setting  
stdby  
Meaning  
The FXS port is in standby.  
W stb  
W tst  
W OOS  
WAN port to which the FXS port is assigned is in standby.  
WAN port to which the FXS port is assigned is under test.  
WAN port to which the FXS port is assigned is out of service.  
FXS Ports  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
noWAN  
There is no WAN port configured in the slot to which the FXS port is  
assigned.  
call  
busy  
idle  
TC  
Call set-up is in progress.  
Call is in progress.  
No call is in progress (port is available for a call).  
The port is in Trunk Conditioning because a CGA alarm occurred on the  
associated WAN port.  
test  
A test is in progress on the port (i.e., you are actively controlling the circuit  
by setting values for Tx ABCD or Rx ABCD).  
The port is in a maintenance condition.  
maint  
6-10  
FXS Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.4 FXS Error Messages  
Refer to Appendix B in the System Reference Guide for further information on Error  
Messages regarding this port.  
6.5 FXS port Troubleshooting  
The FXS port may be faulty if a voice signal is not received at one end of a circuit, or if  
signaling is not detected. The following are possible causes:  
Faulty receiving CPE at the near end (where the problem was first noticed)  
Faulty transmitting CPE at the far (opposite) end  
Faulty cabling between the CPE and FXS port at the near end  
Faulty cabling between the CPE and FXS or FXO port at the far end  
T1 network failure  
Improper port configuration at either end (e.g., time slot and/or WAN port assignments)  
First, verify that the T1 network has not failed. Check for a CGA-Red alarm on the associated  
WAN port at the end where the incoming VF signal loss is first noticed. The CGA indicates  
that the incoming network signal was lost (or that the receiving WAN port is out of frame).  
During the CGA, all voice ports with time slots on that WAN port will also be disabled, and  
the associated far-end WAN port will be in a CGA-Yellow alarm state. If the network is faulty,  
you must clear that trouble to restore your circuits.  
If the network is okay, verify that the proper WAN ports and time slots are assigned to the  
associated FXS and FXO voice ports at both ends, as previously outlined in this chapter. In a  
point-to-point network, the near-end and far-end FX port ports should both be assigned the  
same WAN port and time slot number. Also make sure the other parameters (such as the  
transmit and receive TLPs) are set properly at both ends.  
If the FX port parameters are correct at both ends, and if the network is okay, the trouble is  
isolated to the FXS port or the associated port. Proceed as follows:  
1. At the far end, activate an analog loopback on the FX port.  
2. Send a 0 dBm (digital milliwatt) test signal toward the CPE at that end. That signal will  
be substituted for the normal signal coming from the far-end CPE; it will be sent back to  
the CPE at your end via the loopback path.  
3. Check your CPE for this signal. If it is present, the far-end CPE or cabling to the far-end  
FX port is probably faulty. Disable the loopback and test signal there, and fix the problem.  
If you still don’t receive a signal, go to step 4.  
FXS Ports  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
4. At your end, go to the FXS port Main Screen and send a digital milliwatt test tone (0  
dBm) toward the CPE. If you still don’t receive a signal, check the cabling from the FXS  
port to your CPE, and check the CPE itself. If those items are okay, replace the FXS port  
at your end.  
5. If the FXS port is determined to be faulty, replace it and return the faulty unit for repair  
to the location specified by your distributor.  
6-12  
FXS Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
E&M Ports  
7.1 Introduction  
This chapter provides information regarding the configuration and troubleshooting for the  
E&M Voice Circuits.  
The E&M ports manage the flow of toll-grade voice traffic through the IMACS-200 system.  
Each port encodes an analog (voice, VF) signal to a digital bitstream at the local integrated  
access system for transmission over a T1 network. Each port also decodes the digital signal to  
analog at the remote system. The E&M ports support Transmit Only (TO) and Type I, Type  
II, Type IV and Type V signaling.  
Each port connects to a CPE voice circuits from a PBX or other user facility.  
7.2 E&M Description  
7.2.1 IMACS-200 E&M Description  
The IMACS-200 E&M ports provide an extended transmit TLP range (-16.3dB to + 7.5) for  
dedicated 4-wire modem applications. This range is required for data speeds of 19.2 kbps and  
higher.  
The IMACS-200 supports signalling on the E&M ports. Supported signaling types are Type  
I, Type II, Type IV and Type V and are discussed on the following pages.  
E&M Ports  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
Type I signalling is achieved by connecting a ground on the SG lead. Type I E&M signalling  
is then achieved by operating the E and M leads to achieve off-hook and on-hook  
signals.Figure 7-1 illustrates a typical Type I interface.  
Figure 7-1.Type I E&M Signaling  
Note: For Type I signaling, there should be no connection on the SB lead  
7-2  
E&M Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 7-2 illustrates a Type II E&M signaling interface where the connecting equipment  
(normally a PBX or other inter-office carrier systems) originates on the M-lead. The  
connecting equipment provides a contact closure between the M and SB leads at the interface  
to send an 0ff-hook (originate) and an open between the M and SB leads at the interface to  
send an on-hook. The IMACS-200 provides a contact closure between the E and SG leads at  
the interface to send on off-hook to the connecting equipment and an open between the E and  
SG leads to send an on-hook  
Figure 7-2.Type II E&M Signaling  
E&M Ports  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
Type IV E&M is arranged exactly like Type II E&M, except that a mechanical relay is used  
for the M relay as in Type I E&M, see Figure 7-3.  
Figure 7-3.Type IV E&M Signaling  
7-4  
E&M Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Type V is symmetrical and allows two signaling nodes to be connected back-to-back, as  
illustrated in Figure 7-4. This is the most common interface type used outside of North  
America. Type V uses two leads for supervisor signaling: E, and M. During inactivity the  
E-lead and M-lead are open. The PBX (that acts as trunk circuit side) connects the M-lead to  
the ground in order to indicate the off-hook condition. The IMACS-200 (signaling unit)  
connects the E-lead to the ground in order to indicate off-hook condition.  
Figure 7-4.Type V E&M Signaling  
E&M Ports  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
7.3 E&M port User Screens and Settings  
7.3.1 E&M port Main Screen  
You must configure the E&M port for operation after installing it in the system chassis. This  
is done from the E&M Main port Screen, which is shown in Figure 7-5. To go to that screen,  
highlight the desired port on the System Main Screen, then press <Enter>. The E&M port  
Main Screen shows four columns of settings, one for each of the E&M ports.  
Figure 7-5.Typical E&M port Main Screen  
The bottom highlighted line of this screen shows various actions that you can perform from  
this screen. You perform the desired action by pressing the associated uppercase letter key.  
Table 7-1 on page 7 summarizes these actions. For example, after you configure the E&M port  
ports, press “s” to save your settings.  
7-6  
E&M Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Table 7-1. Main Screen Actions  
Function  
Action  
Save  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., test status).  
Copy  
Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you  
change a lot of entries in one column and wants to repeat those changes in  
subsequent columns.  
Test  
Access is given to the test screen  
taBs  
Main  
Index into the signaling conversion screen.  
Returns to the System Main Screen. If you make changes to settings and do  
not save them, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
configuration settings for the E&M port, along with the available and factory-default option  
settings. The parameters and settings are also described in the following paragraphs.  
Table 7-2. Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
STATE  
User Options  
Notes  
Default  
stdby  
stdby actv  
WAN/SRV  
none wan-1 wan-2 wan-3 wan-4 owan-1 owan-2  
owan-3 owan-4  
none  
TS  
01-24 or 01-31  
01  
MODE  
Rx TLP  
Tx TLP  
CODING  
LB  
to e&m I e&m II e&m IV e&m V  
-16.3 dB to +7.5 dB  
-16.3 dB to +7.5 dB  
u-law a-inv  
off dgtl anlg  
to  
0
0
u-law  
off  
none  
off  
1
PATTRN  
SIG CONV  
none D-mW  
n/a off on  
23  
Notes:  
1. The extended setting range for the IMACS-200 E&M port is from -16.3 to +7.5 dB.  
2. When a WAN or SRV port has not been selected, or when the mode it to, the default  
for Signal Conversion is n/a. When the mode has been selected to be e&m, then the  
default is off.  
E&M Ports  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
STATE  
The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not  
occupy a time slot on a WAN link. Set this field to stdby (standby) for ports that will not be  
used or that are not yet configured. Or, set it to actv (active) for ports that are ready for use.  
WAN  
The WAN setting identifies the WAN or OWAN link assigned to this port. When choosing the  
type of wan, you must also select the desired port of the WAN or OWAN port for transmission  
over the T1 or E1 link.  
It is not necessary to assign all E&M ports to the same WAN or OWAN link, nor to contiguous  
time slots on a WAN or OWAN link.  
TS  
The TS setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is assigned. Values  
range from 1 to 24 for T1 links, and 01 to 31 for E1 links. For a display of the available time  
slots, refer to the cross-connect map for the WAN link; see Chapter 4, System Configuration  
and Operation in the System Reference Guide for information about viewing cross-connect  
maps.  
MODE  
The Mode setting specifies whether or not a port uses E&M signaling, or if it operates in the  
Transmission-Only (TO) mode. Use the to mode if you are connecting the port to a four-wire,  
dedicated-line modem that does not require E&M signaling. Use e&m I, e&m II, e&m IV or  
e&m V, depending on the type of e&m signaling desired. When choosing an E&M signaling  
mode, all ports using E&M must use the same mode.  
Rx TLP  
The Receive Transmission Level Point (TLP) setting controls the amount of gain or loss added  
to a signal after it is decoded to analog. To increase the signal level, set the Rx TLP field to a  
positive number (i.e., the larger the number, the more gain is added). To decrease the signal  
level, set the Rx TLP field to a negative number (i.e., the more negative the number, the more  
the signal level is decreased). For example, an incoming signal at -5 dBm can be increased to  
-2 dBm by setting Rx TLP to +3 dB. The Rx TLP range is -16.3 dB to +7.5 dB.  
7-8  
E&M Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tx TLP  
The Transmit TLP setting controls the amount of gain or loss added to the voice signal coming  
in from the local CPE before it is encoded to digital PCM. To increase the incoming signal  
level, set the Tx TLP field to a negative value (i.e., the more negative the number, the more  
gain is added). To decrease the signal level, set the Tx TLP setting to a positive number (i.e.,  
the more positive the number, the more the signal level is decreased). For example, an  
incoming signal at -16 dBm can be increased to 0 dBm by setting Tx TLP to -16 dB. For the  
IMACS-200 E&M ports, this range is-16.5 dB to +7.5 dB.  
CODING  
The Coding field sets the PCM companding (coding) method used for a port. Changing the  
coding field will apply the coding type selected to all four ports. Generally, the North  
American T1 environment uses u-law (mu-law) coding, and the European E1 envisonment  
uses a-inv. The coding default setting is defined by the type of associated WAN or OWAN  
port.  
LB  
The LB setting allows you to loop a port back toward the network and far end for testing and  
troubleshooting. Figure 7-6 shows the available loopbacks. The dgtl (digital) loopback sends  
the incoming digital signal from the network back toward the far end, without decoding it. The  
anlg (analog) loopback sends the decoded analog signal back to the far end. To disable either  
loopback after testing, set this field to off.  
Figure 7-6. E&M port Loopbacks  
E&M Ports  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
PATTRN  
The Pattern is the outgoing test pattern to be sent to the selected port by the system. You can  
send a different pattern to each port. The none setting disables the test pattern. The D-mW  
(Digital milliwatt) option sends a 1 kHz tone at 0.0 dBm. The setting of the Rx TLP field  
adjusts the D-mW signal level before sending the signal to the CPE.  
SIG CONV  
The Signaling Conversion parameter allows you to change the transmit ABCD signaling bits  
from CCITT (E1) to ANSI (T1) standards, and is accessd by selecting B from the taBs option  
at the bottom of the window.  
The options are off if ANSI signaling is used and on to convert transmit signaling from ANSI  
to CCITT format according to the Interface Card Conversion Table for E&M signaling. This  
setting also converts receive signaling from CCITT to ANSI. To see the options currently  
deployed on a port, Figure 7-7 shows the default settings for the conversion table. This table  
will be commonly used by all ports to which the this option is set to on.  
The C->A column describes conversion done in the downstream direction towards the  
subscriber loop, while the A->C column describes the conversion done in the upstream  
direction, normally towards the T1 interface.  
Figure 7-7.Tabs Signal Conversion - Change Mode  
7-10  
E&M Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7.3.2 Test Screen  
The Test option facilitates testing and maintenance by allowing you to monitor and set the  
status of the analog interface leads, and to monitor or set the value of the A, B, C, and D  
signaling bits of all E&M circuits on that port. In cross-connect systems, the test option also  
allows you to apply test patterns and tones towards the user and network sides of the system.  
Figure 7-8 shows the E&M port Test Screen parameters,Table 7-3 lists some actions you can  
perform from this screen, and Table 7-4 shows the settings for each parameter.  
Figure 7-8. Typical E&M port Test Screen  
Note: The above screen shows the ABCD bits as sent by the Tx and Rx sides. The “c”  
indicated on ports 3 and 4 indicate that the bits displayed will then be run through the  
TABS conversion table as seen in Table 7-3.  
Table 7-3. Test Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e. performance and test data).  
Main  
Returns to the E&M port Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and  
not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
Table 7-4. Test Screen Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
TEST  
Tx ABCD  
off on  
mon set  
off  
mon  
E&M Ports  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
Rx ABCD  
E-Lead  
TO USER  
TO NTWK  
mon set  
mon  
none D-mW  
none D-mW  
mon  
mon  
none  
none  
Tx ABCD  
Rx ABCD  
E-lead  
M-lead  
MODE  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
Status information only; not editable  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
TYPE  
STATUS  
TEST  
The Test parameter shows if the port is in test mode or not. Inactive ports and ports that are  
assigned to inactive WANs will show a test status of n/a. The test status options for active  
ports are off and on.  
Tx ABCD  
The Transmit ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling  
bits being transmitted towards the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the  
transmit side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set  
will bring up a four digit field for users to input the ABCD pattern they want to transmit. Any  
four-digit combination of ones and zeros is acceptable for this setting.  
Rx ABCD  
The Receive ABCD setting allows the user to either monitor the status of the ABCD signaling  
bits being received from the network or set a specific ABCD pattern for testing the receive  
side of the circuit. The options for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring  
up a four digit field for users to input the ABCD pattern they want to receive. Any four digit  
combination of ones and zeros is acceptable.  
E-lead  
The E-lead setting allows the user to either monitor or set the state of the E-lead. The options  
for this field are mon (monitor) or set. Choosing set will bring up the options on (which raises  
the E-lead), or off (which drops the E-lead.  
7-12  
E&M Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USER  
In cross-connect systems only, the To User parameter allows you to break the circuit and send  
a test tone on the user side of the system. The options for this field are none, and D-mW.  
Choose none if you do not want to inject a tone toward the CPE. In this case, the PCM signal  
received from the network is still sent to the CPE in the normal manner.  
TO NTWK  
In cross-connect systems only, the To Network parameter allows you to break the circuit and  
send a test tone on the network side of the system. The options for this field are none, and  
D-mW. Choose none if you do not want to inject a tone toward the network. In this case, the  
PCM signal received from the CPE is still sent to the network in the normal manner.  
Tx ABCD  
The Transmit ABCD informational field shows the current values of the ABCD bits that are  
being transmitted to the network. If TX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via the  
set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the Menu  
of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here.  
Rx ABCD  
The Receive ABCD informational field shows the current values of the ABCD signaling bits  
that are received from the network. If RX ABCD in the top half of the screen is changed via  
the set function mentioned above, and the settings are saved by the Save command in the  
Menu of Actions, the new bit pattern chosen will be reflected here.  
E-lead  
The E-lead information field is a display-only field that reflects the status of the E-lead.  
Valid values are on and off.  
M-lead  
The M-lead information field is a display-only field that reflects the status of the  
M-lead. Valid values are on and off.  
MODE  
The Mode informational field shows the current mode of the port that was selected on the main  
E&M port Screen. Valid settings are E&M.  
E&M Ports  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
TYPE  
The Type informational field shows the current status of the signal field selected on the main  
E&M port screen for this port. Valid settings for E&M and wink modes is loop (loop start).  
STATUS  
The Status field shows the current status of the port. Table 7-5 lists and describes all of the  
possible conditions reported by this field.  
Table 7-5. Status Information Field Settings  
Setting  
stdby  
Meaning  
The E&M port is in standby.  
W stb  
W tst  
W OOS  
noWAN  
WAN port to which the E&M port is assigned is in standby.  
WAN port to which the E&M port is assigned is under test.  
WAN port to which the E&M port is assigned is out of service.  
There is no WAN port configured in the slot to which the E&M port is  
assigned.  
call  
busy  
idle  
TC  
Call set-up is in progress.  
Call is in progress.  
No call is in progress (port is available for a call).  
The port is in Trunk Conditioning because a CGA alarm occurred on the  
associated WAN port.  
test  
A test is in progress on the port (i.e., you are actively controlling the circuit  
by setting values for Tx ABCD or Rx ABCD).  
The port is in a maintenance condition.  
maint  
7-14  
E&M Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7.4 E&M port Error Messages  
Refer to Appendix B in the System Reference Guide for further information on Error  
Messages regarding this port.  
7.4.1 E&M port Troubleshooting  
The E&M port may be faulty if a voice signal is not received at one end of a circuit, or if E&M  
signaling is not detected. The following are possible causes:  
Faulty receiving CPE at the near end (where the problem was first noticed)  
Faulty transmitting CPE at the far (opposite) end  
Faulty cabling between the CPE and E&M port at either end  
Faulty E&M port at either end  
T1 network failure  
Improper port configuration at either end (e.g., time slot and/or WAN assignments)  
First, verify that the T1 network has not failed. Check for a CGA-Red alarm on the associated  
WAN port at the end where the incoming VF signal loss is first noticed. The CGA indicates  
that the incoming network signal was lost (or that the receiving WAN port is out of frame).  
During the CGA, all voice ports with time slots on that WAN port will also be disabled, and  
the associated far-end WAN port will be in a CGA-Yellow alarm state. If the network is faulty,  
you must clear that trouble to restore your circuits.  
If the network is okay, verify that the proper WAN ports and time slots are assigned to the  
associated E&M voice ports at both ends, as previously outlined in this chapter. In a  
point-to-point network, the near-end and far-end E&M ports should both be assigned the same  
WAN port and time slot number. Also make sure the other parameters (such as the transmit  
and receive TLPs) are set properly at both ends.  
If the E&M port parameters are correct at both ends, and if the network is okay, the trouble is  
isolated to the E&M port or the associated port. Proceed as follows:  
1. At the far end, activate an analog loopback on the E&M port.  
2. Send a 0 dBm (digital milliwatt) test signal toward the CPE at that end. That signal will  
be substituted for the normal signal coming from the far-end CPE; it will be sent back to  
the CPE at your end via the loopback path.  
3. Check your CPE for this signal. If it is present, the far-end CPE or cabling to the far-end  
E&M port is probably faulty. Disable the loopback and test signal there, and fix the  
problem. If you still don’t receive a signal, go to step 4.  
E&M Ports  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
4. At your end, go to the E&M port’s Main Screen and send a digital milliwatt test tone  
(0 dBm) toward the CPE. If you still don’t receive a signal, check the cabling from the  
E&M port to your CPE, and check the CPE itself. If those items are okay, replace the  
E&M port at your end.  
5. If the E&M port is determined to be faulty, return the faulty unit for repair to the  
location specified by your distributor.  
7-16  
E&M Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SRU Ports  
Introduction  
Chapter 8  
SRU Ports  
8.1 Introduction  
This chapter provides information regarding the configuration and troubleshooting for the  
Low Delay Subrate Data (LD-SRU) ports.  
The SRU ports allow you to connect up to 5 RS-232, low-speed and medium-speed (300 kbps  
to 38.4 kbps) data terminals to the Integrated Access System. You can multiplex a number of  
those devices onto a single DS0 time slot of a WAN or OWAN port. Each port has delay that  
is a maximum 3ms +/- 10% end-to-end of rates 9.6 kbps or higher for sync, and maximum of  
6ms +/-10% end-to-end of rates 9.6 kbps or higher for async.  
Each LD-SRU port receives timing from either the external DTE or the Integrated Access  
System clock. If the DTE supplies the transmit timing, that clock signal must be synchronized  
to the Integrated Access System’s clock source.  
Note: Some changes to SRU ports require that the ports be put in standby then the active  
modes for the changes to take effect.  
8.2 SRU port User Screens and Settings  
You must configure the SRU port for operation before use. This is done from the SRU port  
Main Screen (Figure 8-1). To go to that screen, highlight the desired port on the System Main  
Screen and press <Enter>. The SRU port Main Screen has five columns of data for port  
configuration purposes. The port numbers on the screen correspond to the port faceplate jacks.  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
SRU Ports  
SRU port User Screens and Settings  
Figure 8-1.Typical SRU port Main Screen  
The highlighted bottom line of this screen shows numerous actions you can perform from this  
screen. To perform an action, simply press the uppercase key indicated on this line. For  
example, to save your option settings for this port, press “s”. Table 8-1 lists the actions you  
can perform.  
8-2  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SRU Ports  
SRU port User Screens and Settings  
Table 8-1. Main Screen Actions  
Action  
Function  
Save  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Refresh  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., test status).  
Copy  
Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you  
change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in  
subsequent columns.  
Test  
Initiates and monitors testing of all SRU port ports. Refer to the Test section  
of this chapter.  
Main  
Returns to the System Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
Table 8-2 lists the SRU port Main Screen parameters and available option settings.  
Table 8-2. Main Screen Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
STATE  
User Options  
Notes  
Default  
stdby  
stdby act  
WAN/SRV  
none wan-1 wan-2 wan-3 wan-4 owan-1 owan-2  
wan-1  
owan-3 owan-4  
01-24 or 01-31  
TS  
01  
a
.3  
1
asyn  
8
FRAME  
RATE  
SR TS  
INTF  
a
b-5  
.3 1.2 2.4 4.8 9.6 14.4 19.2 28.8 38.4  
n/a 1-5  
asyn sync  
1
2
1
8
1
7
2
6
5
COM CF  
3
1
none odd even space mark  
perm l0 l30 l60 l100 rl0 rl3 rl6 rl10 off  
n/a int ext  
off dte net  
n/a off ocu csu dsu  
none  
perm  
n/a  
off  
off  
CTS  
TX CLK  
LB  
LB GEN  
Notes:  
1. The only options available for the SRU ports are: a and b-5.All five ports will use the  
same Frame Format.  
2. Speeds of 0.3, 1.2, and 14.4 are not supported for synchronous channels.  
3. Communication Configuration is a three step process. This field will show n/a when  
sync is chosen as the INTF option.  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
SRU Ports  
SRU port User Screens and Settings  
STATE  
The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. Set this field to stdby  
(standby) for ports that are not to be used or that have not yet been configured. Set it to actv  
(active) for ports that are ready for use. The control leads assume the status shown in Table  
8-3 for the different states.  
Table 8-3. SRU port State Status  
Control Leads  
RLSD  
CTS  
Active  
WAN Link Down Standby  
High or follows remote RTS  
Definable  
Low  
Definable  
Low  
Low  
WAN  
The WAN setting identifies the WAN or OWAN link assigned to this port. When choosing the  
type of wan, you must also select the desired port of the WAN or OWAN port for transmission  
over the T1 or E1 link.  
It is not necessary to assign all SRU ports to the same WAN or OWAN link, nor to contiguous  
time slots on a WAN or OWAN link.  
TS  
The Time Slot setting identifies the time slot on the WAN link to which this port is connected.  
Values range from 01 to 24 for T1 links, and 01 to 31 for E1 links. The SRU port can further  
subdivide the WAN time slot into smaller segments for transmission of low-speed data. Each  
WAN time slot can be further divided into a maximum of twenty 2.4 kbps time slots (see  
FRAME  
The Frame setting allows you to define the sub-rate format that the port will use and to set the  
usable space allotted to each WAN time slot. The choices are DS0A (a) for one subrate time  
slot, DS0B with a limit of five subrate time slots (b-5). Note that all five ports will use the  
same framing mode, whichever the craft person chooses. Figure 8-2 shows the DS0A and  
DS0B framing subrate time slot interaction.  
RATE  
The Rate setting allows you to select the rate in kilobits per second (kbps) for data  
transmission. The selection will change depending upon the framing mode and interface  
selected. Figure 8-2 shows the bandwidth available for each selection.  
8-4  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SRU Ports  
SRU port User Screens and Settings  
WAN port #1 PORT #1 (wan-1)  
TS #1  
TS #2  
1
a
SRU TS  
1-5  
Framing  
b-5  
Maximum Speed  
per SR TS (Kbps)  
38.4  
38.4*  
*Speeds greater than 9.6Kbps will occupy contiguous SRU Timeslots in 9.6Kbps  
increments (i.e. a 19.2Kbps circuit would take SRU timeslots #1 and #2)  
Figure 8-2.SRU Time Slot Integration  
SR TS  
The Subrate Time Slot (SR TS) indicates the subrate position within the DS0 time slot the port  
will occupy (see Figure 8-2). If a framing is selected, only one subrate time slot is supported  
and the SR TS setting will default to 1. If b-5 framing is selected, the available subrate time  
slots are 1 to 5. Portions of subrate time slots can be assigned to any SRU port from any SRU  
port in the system (see the configuration example later in this chapter).  
In b-5 framing, if circuits with speeds greater than 9.6 kbps are assigned to the subrate time  
slot, adjacent subrate time slots must be available to accommodate their size. A 19.2 kbps  
circuit would occupy two contiguous subrate time slots (leaving space for up to three 9.6 kbps  
circuits) and a 38.4 kbps circuit would occupy four contiguous subrate time slots (leaving  
space for one 9.6 kbps circuit).  
The SR TS number selected will be the first segment occupied by this circuit. If a 28.8 kbps  
circuit occupies three segments of the b-5 frame, selecting SR TS 1 will assign it to segments  
1, 2 and 3. Segments 4 and 5 may be assigned either independently to 9.6 (or less) kbps circuits  
in SR TS 4 and 5 or combined for a 19.2 kbps circuit assigned to SR TS 4.  
If a circuit exceeds the slots necessary to accommodate it, such as a 38.4 kbps circuit to SR  
TS 3 in b-5 framing, the message "Invalid SR TS" will be displayed. If a circuit requires more  
space than the SR TS has available, such as having a 38.4 kbps circuit in SR TS 1 and then  
attempting to assign a 19.2 kbps circuit to SR TS 4, the message "SR TS overlapping" will be  
displayed.  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
SRU Ports  
SRU port User Screens and Settings  
INTF  
The Interface setting allows you to choose the protocol necessary for the terminal associated  
with this port. The choices are asyn (Asynchronous), and sync (Synchronous). If Synchronous  
transmission is selected, the choices for STOP, DATA and PAR will show as n/a (not  
applicable).  
Asyn option provides asynchronous to synchronous conversion. The asyn option is a  
streamlined propriety algorithm which will increase the performance of the port.  
COM CF  
The Communication Configuration setting is a three-step process that allows you to choose  
the Data bits, Stop bits, and Parity to be used. The Data setting allows you to change the  
bits-per-byte number depending upon the type of terminal associated with this particular port.  
The options are 8, 7, 6, and 5.  
The Stop bits option allows you to select the number of Stop bits that check data sampling for  
the terminal associated with this port. The options are 1 and 2.  
The third choice is the Parity setting that changes the data parity for the terminal associated  
with this port. The options are none, odd, even, space and mark.  
CTS  
The Clear To Send (CTS) setting allows you to define how the port should respond upon  
receiving a Request to Send (RTS) from the attached DTE. This setting also allows you to  
change the delay time (in milliseconds) from when the port receives RTS until it issues CTS.  
The local option allows RTS to control CTS. The remote-local options allows RTS to control  
both the CTS of the local equipment and RLSD of the remote equipment. The options are  
perm (permanent), l0 (local–immediate), l30 (local - 30 ms), l60 (local - 60 ms), l100 (local  
- 100 ms), rl0 (remote/local - immediate), rl3 (remote/local - 30 ms), rl6 (remote/local - 60  
ms), rl10 (remote/local - 100 ms), and off.  
TX CLK  
The Transmit Clock setting allows you to choose the timing source for this port. The options  
are n/a if async interfacing is chosen and int (internal), if sync interfacing is chosen. The int  
setting uses the Integrated Access System as the clock source, and ext allows the DTE to  
generate transmit timing.  
8-6  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SRU Ports  
SRU port User Screens and Settings  
LB  
The Loopback setting allows you to activate local loopbacks on the SRU port. These settings  
are off, toward the dte (DTE), and toward the net (network). Figure 8-3 shows a diagram of  
the local loopback conditions.  
Figure 8-3.Local Loopbacks  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
SRU Ports  
Test Screen  
8.3 Test Screen  
Pressing “t” (Test command) in the SRU port Main Screen will bring up the Test Screen  
shown in Figure 8-4. From this screen, you can create test situations between SRU ports, or  
between a single port and data test equipment at a remote site.  
Figure 8-4.Typical SRU port Test Screen  
The bottom highlighted line of the Test Screen shows some actions you can perform from this  
screen. To perform an action, just press the uppercase key for the desired choice. Table 8-4  
lists these actions, and Table 8-5 lists the settings in the Test Screen, along with their possible  
and default values. These settings are also described in the following paragraphs.  
8-8  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SRU Ports  
Test Screen  
Table 8-4. Test Screen Actions  
Function  
Action  
Save  
Undo  
Refresh  
Saves changes to settings.  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., test status).  
InsertErr  
Clear  
Allows you to manually insert a single error into the clear data signal.  
Clears the Test Screen and resets all counters to zero.  
Main  
Returns to the SRU port Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and  
not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
Table 8-5. Test Screen Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
BERT  
DIR  
off mark space 1:1 1:7 511 qrss 2047  
net user  
off  
net  
CTS  
norm off on  
norm off on  
norm  
norm  
*****  
*****  
*****  
*****  
*****  
*****  
*****  
*****  
*****  
*****  
*****  
RLSD  
SYNC  
BE  
ES  
SES  
CSES  
OSS  
BER  
ELAP  
RTS  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
SR OSS  
LB ST  
BERT  
Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER) on the  
selected SRU port. The patterns that can be selected are off, mark (all ones), space (all zeros),  
1:1 (alternating 10101010), 1:7 (10000000), 511 (511 test pattern), and 2047 (2047 test  
pattern).  
DIR  
The Direction (DIR) setting allows you to specify where the BERT test signal should be  
directed. The first option is net (network) which means that the test signal will be transmitted  
through the system toward the Wide Area Network (WAN). The user option means that the  
signal will be directed toward the attached DTE device over the RS-232 interface.  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
SRU Ports  
Test Screen  
CTS  
The Clear To Send (CTS) option allows you to define whether the CTS control lead should be  
held on (high) or off (low). Selecting either on or off will override the selection made in the  
SRU port screen. The third option is norm (normal) which means that CTS will behave as  
described in Table 8-3.  
RLSD  
The Receive Level Signal Detect (RLSD) option allows you to define whether the RLSD  
control lead should be held on (high) or off (low). The third option is norm (normal) which  
means that RLSD will behave as described in Table 8-3.  
SYNC  
The Synchronization (SYNC) field tells you if the integrated BERT has achieved  
synchronization either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment.  
Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters.  
BE  
The Bit Error field shows the total number of bit errors logged. Since this is an  
information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters.  
ES  
The Errored Seconds field shows the total number of seconds in which any errors were  
detected. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters.  
SES  
The Severely Errored Seconds (SES) field shows the total number of seconds in which the bit  
error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). Since this is an information-only field, there  
are no user-selectable parameters.  
CSES  
The Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) field is triggered by the occurrence of ten  
consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the CSES field will increment (by  
one) for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive non-Severely Errored  
Seconds. Since this it an information-only field there are no user-selectable parameters.  
8-10  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SRU Ports  
Test Screen  
OSS  
The Out of Synchronization Seconds field shows the number of seconds that the SRU BERT  
has been out of synchronization. Since this is an information-only field, there are no  
user-selectable parameters.  
BER  
The Bit Error Rate (BER) field shows the rate at which errors are being logged. The system  
calculates BER by dividing the number of bit errors (BE) by the total number of bits  
transmitted during the test. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable  
parameters.  
ELAP  
The Elapsed time setting shows the running tally of the total number of seconds during the  
test. Since this is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this  
option.  
RTS  
The Request To Send (RTS) field shows the current status of the RTS control lead. The two  
values that can be displayed are on and off. Since this is an information-only field, there are  
no user-selectable parameters for this option.  
SR OSS  
The Subrate Out of Synchronization Seconds (SR OSS) field shows how many seconds in  
which there was a Subrate framing loss. Since this is an information-only field, there are no  
user-selectable parameters for this option.  
LB ST  
The Loopback State (LB ST) field indicates whether there are any remotely-initiated  
loopbacks currently active on the SRU port. This field will display both latching and  
non-latching loopbacks that are initiated from a remote device via in-band loop-up codes. In  
addition to none, the six possible messages that can be displayed in that field are l-ocu, l-dsu,  
and l-csu for latching loopbacks; or ocu, dsu, and csu for non-latching loopbacks. Since this  
is an information-only field, there are no user-selectable parameters for this option.  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
SRU Ports  
SRU port Error Messages  
8.4 SRU port Error Messages  
Refer to Appendix B in the System Reference Guide for further information on Error  
Messages regarding this port.  
8.5 SRU port Troubleshooting  
SRU port problems could indicate a number of possible causes, including:  
Faulty receiving DTE at the near end (where the problem was first noticed)  
Faulty transmitting DTE at the far (opposite) end  
Faulty cabling between the DTE and SRU port at the near end  
Faulty cabling between the DTE and SRU port at the far end  
T1 network failure  
Improper port configuration at either end (e.g., time slot and/or WAN port assignments)  
Typically, a problem is indicated by a loss of incoming signal on a data port at either end of  
the circuit. When troubleshooting transmission problems on a data circuit passing through an  
SRU port, follow this general sequence:  
1. Verify that the T1 network is working properly by checking for current CGA-Red and  
CGA-Yellow alarms. If the network is faulty, the same transmission problem may exist  
with the other ports of the same SRU port, and also with the data ports of all other data  
ports connected to the same T1 line. If no CGA alarms are present, continue with step 2.  
2. Verify that the DS0 time slot and sub-rate TS assignments of the faulty port at both ends  
of the data circuit path are correct. Also be sure the port is connected to the proper WAN  
port and port and that other critical parameters, such as RATE, are set the same at each  
end. If these assignments are correct, continue with step 4.  
3. At the local end (where the incoming data loss was first observed), use the loopback  
and test signal functions of the SRU port to test the affected port. These tests are  
accessible from the SRU port Main Screen (through the LB and related parameters) and  
its associated Test Screen (through the BERT parameter), as previously described in  
this chapter. These allow you to test the circuit path in segments and thereby quickly  
pinpoint the problem.  
4. If necessary, also perform loopbacks and send test signals to the affected circuit from  
the other end. In addition, you can perform end-to-end tests using a suitable data test  
set at one or both ends of the circuit in conjunction with the loopback functions of the  
SRU port at either end.  
5. If the SRU port is determined to be faulty, the IMACS-200 will need to be replaced or  
returned for repair to the location specified by your distributor.  
8-12  
Sub Rate Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 9  
HSU Ports  
9.1 Introduction  
This chapter provides information regarding the configuration and troubleshooting for the  
IMACS-200 High-Speed Data Ports. The IMACS-200 provides two High-Speed Data ports  
which connect via an RS-530 interface DB-25 connector, and employ V.35 standard for  
high-speed synchronous data exchange.  
The HSU ports allow you to connect high-speed data terminal equipment (DTE) to WAN links  
and/or other HSU ports.  
9.2 HSU Ports  
The IMACS-200 supports two V.35 CPE devices. Each port is configured to operate as a DCE,  
with data speeds set at either 56 or 64 kbps.  
CAUTION!  
If used in a system using a T1 “Line Code” other than “B8ZS,” HSU card ports assigned to multirate  
circuits greater than or equal to 4 or more consecutive time slots at 64kbps must have DTE  
connected to the port prior to activation. Failure to attach DTE will cause a false carrier alarm.  
The IMACS-200 can be used in data applications where the circuit has many timeslots (up to  
24 for T1, and 32 for E1). The transmit and receive clock edges can be individually selected  
(refer to Tx and Rx CLOCK PLRTY descriptions later in this chapter).  
High Speed Data Ports  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
9.2.1 HSU Port Cables  
For connecting HSU Ports for DTE and DCE transmit clocking, use the PRM-1261M cables.  
9.3 HSU Card User Screens and Settings  
The HSU Cards permit configuration and operation through use of several user screens and  
optional settings.  
9.3.1 HSU Card Main Screen  
You must configure the HSU ports for operation. Configuration can be performed from the  
HSU Main Screen, which is shown in Figure 9-1.  
Figure 9-1.HSU Main Screen  
The bottom highlighted line on this screen lists several actions you can perform from the  
screen. To perform an operation, simply press the uppercase letter associated with the desired  
action. For example, to save your option settings, type “s”. Table 9-1 lists the actions you can  
perform.  
Table 9-1. HSU Card Main Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
9-2  
High Speed Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., performance and test data).  
Copy  
Copies the contents of the current column to the next column. Useful if you  
change a lot of entries in one column and want to repeat those changes in  
subsequent columns.  
Test  
Initiates and monitors testing of all HSU Card ports. Refer to the Test section  
of this chapter.  
Main  
Returns to the System Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
Table 9-2. HSU Setting Options and Defaults  
Parameter  
STATE  
User Options  
Notes  
Default  
stdby  
stdby actv  
WAN  
wan-1 wan-2 wan-3 wan-4 owan-1 owan-2  
wan-1  
owan-3 owan-4  
dce  
table  
64k 56k  
int ext  
MODE  
TS  
RATE  
dce  
1
table  
56k  
int  
TX CLOCK  
Tx CLOCK PLRTY norm inv  
Rx CLOCK PLRTY norm inv  
norm  
norm  
norm  
perm  
0
off  
v.54  
off  
DATA PLRTY  
CTS  
norm inv  
perm rlocal ignor local  
CTS DELAY  
LOCAL LB  
LB GEN MODE  
LB GEN  
0 30 60 100  
off dte net  
v.54 ft1  
off ds0  
LB DET  
EER THRHD  
w/to on off  
off 10e-4 10e-5 10e-6 10e-7 10e-8 10e-9  
w/to  
off  
Notes:  
1. The valid range displayed is from 1-24 for T1, and 1-31 for E1.  
STATE  
The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not  
occupy time slots on a WAN link. Set State to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or  
have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use. The control leads  
assume the status shown in Table 9-3 for the different states.  
High Speed Data Ports  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
Table 9-3. HSU State Status  
Control Leads  
Active  
WAN Link Down  
Standby  
Low  
RLSD  
DSR  
CTS  
High or follows remote RTS Low  
High  
High  
Low  
High  
Definable  
Definable  
WAN  
The WAN setting identifies the WAN or OWAN port to which the output of this port is  
directed. I (the options are wan-1 to wan-4, and owan-1 to owan-4).  
MODE  
The Mode parameter allows you to identify how the HSU port appears to the device on the  
other end of the interface cable. The dce option causes the port to be recognized as a DCE  
(data circuit-terminating equipment) device. The dce option is always chosen in the first  
offering of the IMACS-200.This allows the end user to connect a dte device to the port.  
TS  
The TS (time slot) setting identifies the time slots on the WAN link when wan or owan is the  
WAN/SRV setting. The HSU ports can use many time slots on a single WAN or OWAN port  
to create a super-rate circuit for an individual HSU port. One or all DS0 time slots on a single  
T1 or E1 link can be assembled for use by an HSU port in order to satisfy the speed  
requirements of the DTE.  
The time slot numbers range from 1 to 24 for T1, and 1 to 31 for E1. Figure 9-2 shows the  
display when table is selected. Using the space bar to select and deselect the time slot, this  
example shows time slots 10 to 12 on WAN 1-1 assigned to this port. The time slot  
assignments do not have to be contiguous on any card port.  
9-4  
High Speed Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 9-2.HSU Port Time Slot Assignment Screen  
RATE  
The Rate setting allows you to select the bandwidth for all time slots assigned to this port. The  
available options are 56k or 64k. This selection is multiplied by the number of time slots  
assigned to the port, to define the overall port speed. For example, if you choose 64k as the  
port Rate and assign four time slots to that port, the overall port speed is 256 kbps.  
Tx CLOCK  
The Transmit Clock (Tx CLOCK) setting identifies the clock source for the SD (send data)  
signal from the external CPE. The int (internal) setting requires an external DTE to  
synchronize its transmitted data with the clock on the SCT leads. The ext (extended) setting  
requires the DTE to synchronize its transmitted data with the clock on the SCTE leads.  
Use ext with a long cable run to ensure the data and clock are in-phase when they arrive at the  
system. The DTE must loop back the clock on the SCT leads to the SCTE leads.  
If ext is selected but the system does not detect an incoming clock on the SCTE leads, the HSU  
Card automatically generates an internal clock. If this clock is not synchronized with the  
incoming data, reset the CLOCK PLRTY option to synchronize the clock and data. The Tx  
CLOCK PLRTY option settings are described in the next paragraphs.  
High Speed Data Ports  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
Tx CLOCK PLRTY  
The Transmit Clock Polarity (Tx CLOCK PLRTY) setting provides another way to  
compensate for long cables in those cases where the DTE equipment does not provide SCTE.  
When you choose inv (inverted mode), the relationship between the clock and data is altered  
to compensate for long cable runs that the data signals must traverse between the card port and  
CPE. When you choose norm (normal), the relationship between the clock and data is  
unchanged. If you use inv, set the Tx CLK (Transmit Clock) option above to int (internal).  
Rx CLOCK PLRTY  
The Receive Clock Polarity (Rx CLOCK PLRTY) setting provides another way to  
compensate for long cables in those cases where the DTE equipment does not provide SCTE.  
When you choose inv (inverted mode), the relationship between the clock and data is altered  
to compensate for long cable runs that the data signals must traverse between the card port and  
CPE. When you choose norm (normal), the relationship between the clock and data is  
unchanged. If you use inv, set the Tx CLK (Transmit Clock) option above to int (internal).  
DATA PLRTY  
The Data Polarity (DATA PLRTY) option allows you to either send all data bits to the network  
as normal ones and zeros, or to invert all bits in the transmitted data stream. Choose norm  
(normal) to leave the transmitted data intact; or, choose inv (inverted) to invert all outgoing  
data. This can be helpful in ensuring minimum-ones density transmission over T1 links when  
the data contains long strings of zeros. Inverting the zeros reduces the likelihood that the  
composite T1 stream will not meet minimum-ones density requirements. Both systems of the  
end-to-end HSD circuit path require the same DATA PLRTY option setting.  
CTS  
The Clear To Send (CTS) setting controls when data is sent. Some DTE equipment must  
receive a CTS signal before transmitting data. Set the CTS option to perm (permanent) to  
make CTS permanently High (asserted). Choose rlocal (remote-local) to allow RTS to control  
both CTS on the local DTE device and RLSD on the remote DTE device.  
Choose to ignor (ignore) to always force CTS Low (negated). Set the CTS option to locl  
(local) to make CTS follow RTS from the local DTE.  
9-6  
High Speed Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CTS DELAY  
The Clear To Send (CTS) Delay setting delays changes in the CTS signal in the local mode.  
Enter the value you need in milliseconds. The available options are 0, 30, 60, and 100 ms. If  
you do not know what value you need, start with 0 (zero) ms and increase the value gradually  
until you no longer experience problems. The CTS option above must be set to locl before the  
CTS DELAY setting has any effect.  
LOCAL LB  
The Local Loopback (LOCAL LB) option activates a loopback on the selected card port.  
Choose the dte setting to loop the outgoing data from the external DTE device back to the  
DTE receiver. This loopback (see Figure 9-3 on page 9-7) allows you to check the local  
cabling and most of the circuitry in the HSU port. It also disconnects the incoming data from  
the far end.  
Figure 9-3.Local DTE Loopback  
Choose the net (network) setting to loop the incoming data from the network back toward the  
far end. This loopback is shown in Figure 9-4. It tests some of the local HSU Card circuitry,  
the local system common cards, the WAN link card, the far-end HSU port and CPE device,  
and the WAN link between the two sites. The net setting also drops the Data Set Ready (DSR)  
control signal output on the HSU port.  
High Speed Data Ports  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
Figure 9-4.Local Network Loopback  
LB GEN MODE  
The Loopback Generation Mode (LB GEN MODE) setting defines the type of inband loop-up  
and loop-down codes that will be sent to the remote equipment. Two industry-standard codes  
are supported: v.54, which is compatible with CCITT V.54 standard and ft1, which is  
compatible with ANSI Fractional T1 standards.  
LB GEN  
If you selected v.54 or ft1 as the Loopback Generation (LB GEN) mode setting, the Loopback  
Generation setting allows you to send an on (loop-up command) or off (loop-down  
command).  
Note that you cannot perform loop-up and loop-down commands on more than one port of the  
IMACS-200 simultaneously. You must finish all loopback operations on one port before  
starting them on another port.  
LB DET  
Depending on the selection you made for the Loopback Generation mode above, the  
IMACS-200 port will respond to any of the loopback codes generated by a remote system. The  
Loopback Detection (LB DET) setting lets you enable or disable this capability on each port.  
However, this setting does not affect local loopback commands from a local control terminal.  
Choose off to have the port ignore remote loopback commands. Choose on to make the port  
monitor for loopback commands sent from the remote equipment. Note that the system will  
detect only the loopbacks in the format selected as the LB GEN mode. When the system  
detects a loopback code, it loops the data back until the remote equipment releases the  
loopback. The w/to (with time-out) setting is the same as on, except that after 10 minutes the  
system automatically releases the loopbacks initiated by the remote equipment.  
9-8  
High Speed Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EER THRHD  
The Excessive Error Rate (EER) Threshold (THRHD) parameter setting defines an error rate  
threshold which, when exceeded, causes an alarm to be declared. If the number of errors  
exceeds this threshold, an E will be placed in the Status Column of the port’s Performance  
Monitoring Screen. The available options are from 10e-4 (one error in 10,000 bits) to 10e-9  
(one error in 1,000,000,000 bits), or off. Choose off if you do not want to report alarms for  
excessive error rates.  
High Speed Data Ports  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
9.3.2 HSU Card Test Screen  
Selecting “Test” from the HSU Main Screen will access the Test Screen shown in Figure 9-5.  
From this screen, you can create test situations between HSU ports, or between a single port  
and test equipment at a remote site. Table 9-4 lists the actions you can perform from the  
bottom line of this screen, and Table 9-5 lists the settings presented on this screen, along with  
their possible and default values.  
Figure 9-5.HSU Port Test Screen  
Table 9-4. Test Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., performance and test data).  
InsertErr Allows you to manually insert a single error into the clear data signal.  
Clear  
Main  
Clears the Test Screen and resets all counters to zero.  
Returns to the HSU Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
9-10  
High Speed Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Table 9-5. Test Screen Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
BERT  
User Options  
off mark space 1:1 1:7 3:24 qrss prb11  
prb15 prb20  
Notes  
Default  
off  
DIR  
net user  
net  
SYNC  
BE  
ES  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
SES  
CSES  
OSS  
BER  
ELAP  
LB ST  
BERT  
The Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER)  
on the selected HSU port. The patterns that can be selected are off, mark (1111), space (0000),  
1:1 (1010 alternating), 1:7 (0100-0000), 3:24, qrss (quasi-random signal source),  
prb11(pseudorandom binary sequence), prb15 and prb20.  
SYNC  
The Synchronization field indicates if the integrated BERT has achieved synchronization  
either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment. This is an  
information-only field; it is not user-configurable.  
BE  
The Bit Error (BE) field indicates the total number of bit errors logged. This is an  
information-only field; it is not user-configurable.  
ES  
The Errored Seconds (ES) field indicates the total number of seconds in which errors were  
detected. This is an information-only field; it is not user-configurable.  
High Speed Data Ports  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
SES  
The Severely Errored Seconds (SES) field indicates the total number of seconds in which the  
bit error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). This is an information-only field; it is  
not user-configurable.  
CSES  
The Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) field is triggered by the occurrence of ten  
consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, this field will increment (by one) for  
each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive non-Severely Errored Seconds. This  
is an information-only field; it is not user-configurable.  
OSS  
The Out of Synchronization Seconds (OSS) field indicates the number of seconds that the  
HSU BERT has been out of synchronization. This is an information-only field; it is not  
user-configurable.  
BER  
The Bit Error Rate (BER) field indicates the rate at which errors are being logged. The system  
calculates BER by dividing the number of bit errors (BE) by the total number of bits  
transmitted during the test. This is an information-only field; it is not user-configurable.  
ELAP  
The Elapsed time (ELAP) setting indicates the running tally of the total number of seconds  
during the test. This is an information-only field; it is not user-configurable.  
LB ST  
The Loopback State (LB ST) field indicates whether there are any remotely-initiated  
loopbacks currently active on the HSU port. This field displays latching loopbacks initiated  
from a remote device via in-band loop-up codes. In addition to none, the system will display  
V.54 or FT1 (fractional T1). This is an information-only field; it is not user-configurable.  
9-12  
High Speed Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.4 HSU Error Messages  
Refer to Appendix B for further information on HSU Error Messages.  
9.5 HSU Port Troubleshooting  
Problems with an HSU ports could be caused by a number of things. Typically, a problem is  
indicated by a loss of incoming signal on a data port at either end of the circuit. You can  
perform numerous tasks to isolate the trouble and clear it. When troubleshooting transmission  
problems on a data circuit passing through an HSU port, follow this general sequence:  
1. First, verify that the T1 network is working properly by checking for current CGA-Red  
and CGA-Yellow alarms. If the network is faulty, the same transmission problem will  
exist with the other HSU port, and also with the data ports of all other data cards  
connected to the same T1 line. If no CGA alarms are present, continue with step 2.  
2. If the trouble is only with the current HSU port, continue with step 3.  
3. Check the DS0 time slot assignments of the faulty port at both ends of the data circuit  
path. Also be sure the port is connected to the proper WAN port at each end. If these  
assignments are correct, continue with step 4.  
4. At the local end (where the incoming data loss was first observed), use the loopback  
and test signal functions of the HSU port to test the affected port. These tests are  
accessible from the HSU Main Screen and associated Test Screen, as previously  
described in this chapter. They allow you to test the circuit path in segments and thereby  
quickly pinpoint the problem.  
5. If necessary, also perform loopbacks and send test signals to the affected circuit from  
the other end. In addition, you can perform end-to-end tests using a suitable data test set  
at one or both ends of the circuit in conjunction with the loopback functions of the HSU  
port at either end.  
6. Should the HSU port be determined as faulty, return the IMACS-200 for repair to the  
location specified by your distributor.  
High Speed Data Ports  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
9-14  
High Speed Data Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10  
OHSU ports  
10.1 Introduction  
This chapter provides configuration, and troubleshooting information for the optional Optical  
High-Speed Data Unit (OHSU) ports. These ports are labeled on the rear faceplate as OHSU1  
and OHSU2. Connectors above each OHSU port LED indicator are labeled Tx and Rx for the  
transmit and receive fiber connectors. Each OHSU port allows you to connect to Telephone  
Protection Equipment (TPE) in compliance with IEEE C37.94.  
Refer to the IMACS-200 Ordering Guide on page vi of the Product Description Chapter for  
information regarding units that contain the Optional OHSU interface.  
10.2 OHSU port  
10.2.1 Two-Port OHSU port Description  
The OHSU port provides two full duplex IEEE C37.94 multi-mode optical ports for optical  
serial N times 64 kbps interface capability. Each optical port contains a transmit (Tx) and  
receive (Rx) connector along with a status LED. The ports shown below in Figure 10-1 show  
the two ports on the rear of the box, with the dust caps removed from OHSU port 1, ready for  
optical connectors.  
Figure 10-1.Optional two-Port OHSU port  
OHSU Ports  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
o.  
10.2.2 OHSU port Cables  
The OHSU port utilizes 50 um or 62.5 um optical fiber cables with BFOC12.5 (ST)  
connectors. A separate transmit and receive fiber is required for each port.  
10.3 OHSU port User Screens and Settings  
The OHSU ports permit configuration and operation through use of several user screens and  
optional settings.  
10.3.1 OHSU port Main Screen  
You must configure the OHSU port ports for operation. Configuration can be performed from  
the OHSU port Main Screen, which is shown in Figure 10-2. To access that screen, highlight  
the desired port in the System Main Screen and press <Enter>.  
Figure 10-2.Typical OHSU port Main Screen  
The bottom highlighted line on this screen lists several actions you can perform from the  
screen. To perform an operation, simply press the uppercase letter associated with the desired  
action. For example, to save your option settings, type “s”. Table 10-1 lists the actions you can  
perform.  
10-2  
OHSU Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Table 10-1. OHSU port Main Screen Actions  
Function  
Action  
Save  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., performance and test data).  
Main  
Returns to the System Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
Table 10-2. OHSU port Setting Options and Defaults  
Parameter  
STATE  
User Options  
Default  
stdby  
stdby actv  
WAN/SRV  
none wan-1 wan-2 wan-3 wan-4  
none  
owan-1 owan-2 owan-3 owan-4  
MODE  
mux  
mux  
TS  
RATE  
TX CLOCK  
LOCAL LB  
table (up to 12 TS)  
64k  
int (mux MODE)  
off user net  
no assignment  
64k  
int  
off  
STATE  
The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not  
occupy time slots on a WAN link. Set State to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or  
have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use.  
WAN  
The WAN setting identifies the WAN or OWAN port to which the output of this port is  
directed. The options are wan-1 to wan-4, and owan-1 to owan-4.  
MODE  
The Mode parameter appears for information only. The OHSU is fixed in the MUX mode.  
OHSU Ports  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
WAN TS  
The TS (time slot) setting identifies the time slots on the WAN link. Unlike other user ports,  
the OHSU port can use many time slots on a single WAN or OWAN port to create a super-rate  
circuit for an individual OHSU port. One to 12 DS0 time slots on a single T1 or E1 can be  
assembled for use by an OHSU port in order to satisfy the speed requirements of the  
Telephone Protection Device (TPD).  
The time slot numbers range from 1 to 24 for T1 links, and 1 to 31 for E1 links. Figure 10-3  
shows the display when table is selected. Using the space bar to select and deselect the time  
slot, this example shows time slots 1 to 5 on WAN 1-1 assigned to port 2. The time slot  
assignments have to be contiguous on any port.  
Figure 10-3.Typical OHSU Port Time Slot Assignment Screen  
Tx CLOCK  
The OHSU ports behave as IEEE C37.94 MUX ports so the Transmit Clock (Tx CLOCK)  
setting can only be int (internal).  
LOCAL LB  
The LOCAL Loopback (LOCAL LB) option activates a loopback on the selected port. Choose  
the User setting to loop the outgoing data from the external TPE device back to the TPE  
receiver. This loopback (see Figure 10-4) allows you to check the local cabling and most of  
the optical circuitry in the OHSU port. It also disconnects the incoming data from the far end.  
10-4  
OHSU Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 10-4.Local User Loopback  
Choose the net (network) setting to loop the incoming data from the network back toward the  
far end. This loopback is shown in Figure 10-5. It tests some of the local OHSU port circuitry,  
the local system common ports, the WAN link port, the far-end OHSU port and CPE device,  
and the WAN link between the two sites.  
Figure 10-5.Local Network Loopback  
Alarm  
The alarm field is an indication field that shows the optical link status.  
Table 10-3. Alarm Field  
Field  
Optical Link Status  
The optical link is operating properly.  
Norm  
Yellow  
Red  
The TPE is reporting a reception fault.  
The OHSU port is reporting a reception fault.  
OHSU Ports  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
10-6  
OHSU Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarm ports  
Introduction  
Chapter 11  
Alarm ports  
11.1 Introduction  
The IMACS-200 system has eight alarm ports configured as:  
Four outbound alarm switches (relay contacts) to allow the system to report alarms to  
external buzzers, bells, lights, alarm annunciators and other systems. The alarm  
contacts are controlled by the system software and can be configured for reporting  
various internal IMACS-200 alarms.  
Four inbound alarm sensors will allow the IMACS-200 system to receive alarms reported  
by external devices such as back-up power systems, open door sensors, high water  
sensors, etc. Each inbound port has a sensor that detects activity from alarm contacts  
on the external equipment. Once detected, the alarm is reported on the IMACS-200  
user interface and in its alarm log.  
Each alarm port can be individual controlled by the system operator. These ports are discussed  
in detail below.  
Alarm Ports  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
Alarm ports  
Alarm port User Screens and Settings  
11.2 Alarm port User Screens and Settings  
11.2.1 Alarm Filter Screen Sensor Setting  
First, make sure the master setting for all alarm sensors is set properly as the SENSOR variable  
in the Alarm Filter Screen. To set this variable, first select Alarms from the System Main  
Screen, then choose Filters. This will display a list of alarm filters, as shown in Figure 11-1.  
In this menu, use the arrow keys to highlight the first column of the SENSOR line. Pressing  
<Enter> displays the options ignore, log, and report. The option chosen here will act as the  
highest-level option for all alarm port sensors. If this variable is set to ignore, any alarm  
conditions on the alarm port will be ignored, even if you set them up individually to log or  
report.  
Likewise, if you set this variable to log, all sensors on the Alarm port that are set to anything  
other than ignore will be logged but not reported. For this reason, it is crucial that the  
SENSOR variable be set to report (see Figure 11-1). The following screen is the default alarm  
filter settings that are set on the IMACS-200.  
Figure 11-1.Alarm Filter Screen  
11.2.2 Alarm Ports Main Screen  
Figure 11-2 shows the Alarm level from the Main Screen. To go to this screen, highlight the  
ALM area in the System Main Screen and press <Enter>.  
11-2  
Alarm Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alarm ports  
Alarm port User Screens and Settings  
Figure 11-2. Alarm Level from the Main Screen  
Figure 11-3 shows the Alarm Ports Main Screen. This screen allows the crafts person to  
individually set the alarm outputs (SWITCH) and the alarm inputs (SENSOR).The inputs are  
received on leads through the 50-pin Amphenol connector. Please refer to Table 2-5 on page  
2-8 for the pin-out descriptions. The outputs are transmitted through the RJ45 connector  
labeled ALARM on the rear of the IMAC-200 chassis, along with the Sub Rate Data  
connectors. Please refer to Table 2-9 on page 2-11 for a description of the output pin-outs.  
Figure 11-3.Alarm Contact Settings  
The bottom highlighted line of the screen shows actions that you can perform from this screen.  
To perform an action, simply press the uppercase letter on your keyboard that corresponds to  
the desired action. Table 11-1 lists these actions, and Table 11-1 summarizes the port option  
settings and default values. Each parameter is also described in the following paragraphs.  
Alarm Ports  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
Alarm ports  
Alarm port User Screens and Settings  
Table 11-1. Alarm Contacts Main Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Undo  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated on screen (i.e., alarm data).  
Main  
Returns to the System Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and  
not saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
Table 11-2. Alarm Contacts Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
SWITCH  
stdby actv  
minor major any  
stdby actv  
stdby  
minor  
stdby  
close  
ACT ON  
SENSOR  
TRIG ON  
close open  
SWITCH  
The Switch setting indicates that the outbound alarm switch is actv (on) or stdby (off).  
ACT ON  
The Act On parameter defines the type of system alarm that will cause the switch to trigger.  
Program each alarm switch to trigger on minor (information and minor) alarms, major (major  
and critical) alarms, or any alarm message.  
SENSOR  
The Sensor setting indicates the inbound alarm sensor is actv (on) or stdby (off).  
TRIG ON  
The Trigger On parameter defines if the sensor should report an external alarm upon sensing  
the opening (open) or the closure (close) of the external contact to which it is connected.  
11-4  
Alarm Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alarm ports  
Alarm port Error Messages  
11.3 Alarm port Error Messages  
Refer to Appendix B in this Guide for further information on Error Messages regarding these  
ports.  
11.4 Alarm port Troubleshooting  
Alarm port problems could indicate a number of possible causes. Typically, a problem is  
indicated by the loss of an incoming alarm signal on a sensor port or the lack of a contact  
closure/open in response to an internal alarm. Steps designed to isolate the source of the  
problem and return the port to normal operation are detailed below. When troubleshooting  
Alarm port problems, you should follow this general sequence:  
1. Verify that the Alarm port sensor filter (SENSOR) is set to either log or report in the  
Alarm Filters Menu. This menu is accessed by selecting "Alarms" from the Main Screen  
(not the Alarm port Screen), and then selecting "Filters." Column 1 lists the filter setting  
(ignore, log, or report). You can change the filter setting by highlighting the item you wish  
to change and pressing the <Enter> key. Use the arrow keys to highlight a new filter  
setting and press the <Enter> key again. If you are satisfied with your selections,  
remember to "Save" before exiting the screen. If you make any changes and then attempt  
to exit the screen without saving, you will be prompted "Ok to lose changes (y/n)?" You  
must select "y" or "n". If you select "y", any changes will be lost and all selections will  
revert to the last saved state.  
2. On the Alarm port menu, verify that the switch/sensor in question is set to active (actv).  
If set correctly and the problem is with a switch (contact), go to step 3. If the problem is  
with a sensor, go to step 5.  
3. Verify that the amphenol cable is connected correctly to the Voice port. At a  
cross-connection point between the Alarm port and the external “scan point”, open the  
circuit under test. Connect a Volt-Ohmmeter set to read resistance across the Alarm port  
contact in question. If no alarm of the type (Major, Minor or Any) that the contact is  
programmed to act upon is present, and it is a normally open (NO) contact, the meter will  
read infinite resistance. If you are testing a normally closed (NC) contact, the meter will  
read 0 ohms resistance.  
4. Generate an alarm of the type (Major, Minor or Any) that the contact is programmed  
to act upon. The Volt-Ohmmeter should detect a resistance change from 0 to infinite or  
infinite to 0, depending on the type of contact (NO or NC). If no change is detected, the  
switch port may be defective.  
5. Verify the RJ45 cable is connected correctly to the Alarm port. At a cross-connection  
point between the Alarm port and the external equipment, open the circuit under test.  
Connect a short across the Alarm port sensor input in question. A SENSOR alarm should  
be reported. If no alarm is reported, the sensor port may be defective.  
Alarm Ports  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
Alarm ports  
Alarm port Troubleshooting  
6. If the Alarm port is determined to be faulty, return the faulty unit for repair to the  
location specified by your distributor.  
11-6  
Alarm Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Routing  
Introduction  
Chapter 12  
IP Routing  
12.1 Introduction  
This chapter provides information for the IP Router (IPR) function contained in the IMACS  
200 platform.  
12.2 IPR Description  
12.2.1 IMACS 200 IPR  
The IMACS 200 IPR port is an Ethernet interface port and uses a modular jack for a 10Base-T  
connection (RJ48), and is labelled ENET on the rear panel of the IMACS 200.  
The IMACS 200 IPR port is an IPR router that routes packets based on IP destination address.  
IPR routes IP datagrams between Ethernet and Frame Relay PVCs. Frame Relay PVCs must  
be associated with the Frame Relay port. IPR also has provisions to forward IP packets to and  
from the host (CPU) IP node of the IMACS 200 that IPR resides in. It automatically takes care  
of all the IP fragmentation to and from the host (CPU) IP node.  
The maximum number of bytes that an IPR can handle in a single packet is 1520 bytes  
regardless whether a packet arrives from Ethernet or Frame Relay interface.  
Currently, the IPR does not support SNMP, and will be available in a future release. It uses the  
standard Ethernet encapsulation, utilizing 14 bytes Ethernet Header: Source Ethernet Address  
(6 bytes), Destination Ethernet Address (6 bytes), and a Protocol Type (2 bytes). IPR supports  
RIP (Routing Information Protocol, RFC 1058) for dynamically discovering IP routes from  
adjacent IP routers on Frame Relay or Ethernet.  
The IMACS 200 implementation of the IPR function does not contain provisions for the  
bridging function. The WAN interface is standard encapsulation of Ethernet over Frame Relay  
(RFC 1490).  
IPR  
12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
IP Routing  
Frame Relay Network  
12.3 Frame Relay Network  
12.3.1 IPR Connecting IP LANs  
The IPR Card can be used for connecting IP LANs together through Frame Relay Network.  
Figure 12-1 shows a Frame Relay Network between two Ethernet LANs.  
Figure 12-1.IPR Card Connected to IP LANs through Frame Relay Network  
12-2  
IPR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing  
Frame Relay Network  
12.3.1.1 IPR to the Internet  
The IPR card can be used as a gateway to the Internet through Frame Relay Network. Figure  
12-2 shows how the IPR is routed through Frame Relay Network to the Internet Router.  
Figure 12-2.IPR Card Routed to the Internet through Frame Relay Network  
IPR  
12-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IP Routing  
Frame Relay Network  
12.3.1.2 IPR  
The IPR Card can be used for connecting IP nodes on Ethernet to the IP nodes on Frame Relay  
Network.This is used for network management solutions. Figure 12-3 shows how the IPR card  
is used to connect IP nodes on Frame Relay Network.  
Figure 12-3.IPR Card Connected to IP Nodes on Ethernet to Frame Relay Network  
12-4  
IPR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
12.4 IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
12.4.1 IPR Main Screen  
The Ethernet IP screen activates the Ethernet ports for routing to an IP address. Figure 12-4  
shows the Ethernet and Default IP screen.  
Figure 12-4.IPR Ethernet and Default IP Screen  
Table 12-1. IPR 1Ethernet and Default IP Screen Actions  
Action  
Ping  
Function  
Send a ping message to an address  
Save  
Undo  
Fr  
Save the parameter settings  
Resets the parameter settings to default  
Go to Frame Relay screen  
rOute  
Refresh  
Main  
Go to Routing Table Screen  
Refreshes the current screen  
Go back to the IP Interface Menu screen  
IPR  
12-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
Table 12-2. IPR 10B2 and 10BT Ethernet and Default IP Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
stdby  
0.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255  
none  
off  
ETH IPR STATE  
ETH IPR ADDR  
ETH IPR MASK  
ETH IPR RIP  
actv  
stdby  
IP Address of Ethernet Port  
IP mask of Ethernet Port  
none R T R&T  
on off  
EHT IPR SH  
DEFAULT GATEWAY  
ipaddr  
0.0.0.0  
ETH IPR STATE  
Activates or deactivates Ethernet port. The settings are actv or stdby.  
ETH IPR ADDR  
IPR’s own Ethernet IP address on this IP network.  
ETH IPR MASK  
The IP netmask value used for this IP network.  
ETH IPR RIP  
RIP parameters. The default is R&T (Receive & Transmit). Other options are R, T, and none.  
ETH IPR SH  
Enables or disables split horizon on Ethernet. Options are yes or no.  
DEFAULT GATEWAY  
IP address of the default gateway.  
12-6  
IPR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
12.4.2 Frame Relay Ports Configuration Screen  
The Frame Relay Ports Configuration screen displays when pressing “F” (Fr) from the IP  
Interface Menu screen. Figure 12-5 shows the Frame Relay Ports Configuration screen. This  
screen allows the user to activate the Frame Relay ports.  
Figure 12-5.IPR Frame Relay Menu  
Table 12-3. IPR Frame Relay Menu Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Function  
Saves parameter settings  
Undo  
Refresh  
pVc  
Lmi  
Main  
Undo (without saving) the actions performed to this point.  
Refreshes current screen  
Goes to the Frame Relay PVC Configuration screen  
Goes to the Frame Relay LMI screen for this port  
Returns to the Frame Relay menu screen  
IPR  
12-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
Table 12-4. IPR Frame Relay Menu Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
stdby  
FRM RLY STATE  
FRM RLY WAN  
actv stdby  
wan-1 wan-2 wan-3 wan-4 owan-1 owan-2 none  
owan-3 owan-4  
FRM RLY TS  
1-24, 1-31  
n/a  
FRM RLY PORT  
FRM RLY LMI  
u-dte u-dce nni none  
ansi ccitt lmi none  
none  
n/a  
FRM RLY T391  
FRM RLY T392  
FRM RLY N391  
FRM RLY DCE N392  
FRM RLY DTE N392  
FRM RLY DCE N393  
FRM RLY DTE N393  
5-30  
5-30  
1-255  
1-10  
1-10  
1-10  
1-10  
n/a or 10  
n/a or 15  
n/a or 6  
n/a or 3  
n/a or 3  
n/a or 4  
n/a or 4  
off  
FRM RLY LOOPBACK off line local  
FRM RLY STATE  
Activates or disables the Frame Relay port. Options are actv (active), or stdby (standby).  
FRM RLY WAN  
Point to the WAN or Server slot. Options are wan-1 through wan-4.  
FRM RLY TS  
Can only be set for WAN case.  
FRM RLY PORT  
Frame Relay port type. Choices are u-dte, u-dce, nni, none.  
FRM RLY LMI  
LMI Encapsulation. Choices are ansi, ccitt, lmi, none.  
FRM RLY T391  
The Q.933 DTE polling interval, defining the time to send a status enquiry message.  
12-8  
IPR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
FRM RLY T392  
The Q.933 DCE polling interval, defining the time to expect a status enquiry message.  
FRM RLY N391  
Defines the time interval for the DTE to send a full status enquiry message every N391 polling  
cycles.  
FRM RLY DCE N392  
Defines the number of errors allowed within the last N393 events prior to bringing down the  
link.  
FRM RLY DTE N392  
Defines the number of errors allowed within the last N393 events prior to bringing down the  
link.  
FRM RLY DCE N393  
Used in conjunction with the N392 setting. The Frame Relay link is disabled if there are N392  
errors in the last N393 events. DTE events are defined by sending a status enquiry message.  
A DCE event is receiving a status enquiry message, or having the T392 timer expire.  
FRM RLY DTE N393  
Used in conjunction with the N392 setting. The Frame Relay link is disabled if there are N392  
errors in the last N393 events. DTE events are defined by sending a status enquiry message.  
A DCE event is receiving a status enquiry message, or having the T392 timer expire.  
FRM RLY LOOPBACK  
Enables or disables loopback on this port. Options are off, line, and local.  
IPR  
12-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
12.4.3 Frame Relay PVC Configuration Screen  
The Frame Relay PVC Configuration screen, Figure 12-6, configures the Frame Relay PVC  
by entering the PVC name, state, and port in which to activate.  
Figure 12-6.IPR Frame Relay PVC Configuration Screen  
Table 12-5. IPR Frame Relay PVC Configuration Screen Actions  
Action  
Refresh  
Add  
Function  
Refreshes the current screen  
Adds a PVC  
dElete  
pgUp  
pgDn  
Main  
Deletes a PVC  
Scrolls up one page of information  
Scrolls down one page of information  
Returns to the Frame Relay Menu screen  
12-10  
IPR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
Table 12-6. IPR FR PVC Configuration Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
stdby  
16-1023  
xxxxxxx  
R&T  
STATE  
DLCI  
actv stdby  
16-1023  
IP INTF  
RIP  
IP Interface name (7 characters long)  
none R T R&T  
SH  
yes no  
yes  
STATE  
This activates or deactivates the PVC. Options are actv (active), and stdby (standby).  
DLCI  
DLCI number for the current PVC. Options are 16-1023. Do not use 1023 if the LMI TYPE  
is set to ‘lmi’  
IP INTF  
The IP address of this PVC.  
IP MASK  
The IP Netmask of this PVC.  
RIP  
Options are T, T R&T, and none. Options are none, R, T, and R&T.  
SH  
Split Horizon. Options are off or on. The recommended option is on.  
IPR  
12-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
12.4.4 Frame Relay Port LMI Screen  
The Frame Relay Port LMI screen Figure 12-7, shown below displays the information relating  
to the DCE and DTE statistics for IPR port. By pressing the “C”(Clear) key all information  
displayed on the current screen will be cleared (erased).  
Figure 12-7.IPR Frame Relay Port LMI Screen  
12-12  
IPR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
12.4.5 IP Routing Table Screen  
The IP Routing Table is a display only screen. Figure 12-8 will display when pressing “O”  
(rOut) from the IP Interface Menu screen. The current IP routes will display. Under the  
Interface parameter HOST RT and ETHER are shown. The HOST RT is the CPU host IP node.  
And the ETHER is the current route pointing to the Ethernet. If the route is pointing to Frame  
Relay, then Interface will display the name of the PVC to which this route points.  
Figure 12-8.IPR IP Routing Table Screen  
The Stat option from the above screen accesses the Static Routes Configuration Screen.  
IPR  
12-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
12.4.6 Static Routes Configuration Screen  
The Static Route Configuration screen, Figure 12-9 displays when pressing “S” (Stat) from  
the IP Interface Menu screen. The IP Static information can be added by entering a valid IP  
net address (e.g. 125.15.0.0). The IP Static routes will always be used in distance, instead of  
the dynamic routes. This distance will be advertised in any routing updates for this static route.  
Figure 12-9.IPR IP Static Routes Configuration Menu Screen  
Table 12-7. IPR IP Static Routes Configuration Table Screen Actions  
Action  
Refresh  
Function  
Refreshes the current screen  
Add  
Adds the selected information on the screen (e.g. IP net, Subnet, etc.)  
Deletes the selected information from the screen  
Scrolls up through the list of IP static routes  
Scrolls down through the list of IP static routes  
Returns to the IP Interface Menu screen  
dElete  
pgUp  
pgDn  
Main  
12-14  
IPR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
Table 12-8. IPR IP Static Routes Configuration Option Settings and Defaults  
Parameter  
IP NET  
SUBNET  
GOTO  
DIST  
User Options  
A valid IP address  
A valid subnet mask  
A valid IP address  
1-15  
Default  
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0  
1-15  
IP NET  
A destination IP network address. Enter a valid IP address (e.g. 125.15.0.0).  
SUBNET  
A subnet mask. Enter a valid subnet mask (e.g. 255.255.0.0).  
GOTO  
IP address of the next IP gateway for this static route. Enter a valid IP address gateway (e.g.  
0.0.0.0).  
DIST  
Administrative distance (in hops) for this static route.  
IPR  
12-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
IP Routing  
IPR Configuration Screens and Settings  
12-16  
IPR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13  
OWAN Port  
13.1 Introduction  
This chapter provides configuration, and troubleshooting information for the optional Optical  
WAN (OWAN) port. This port is labeled on the rear faceplate as OWAN1 and OWAN2.  
Connectors above each OWAN port LED indicator carry both the transmit and receive  
connections within each fiber. The OWAN port is a single transport facility that allows for a  
1+1 protection, auto-switching when a loss of Signal (LOS) or transmitter fail event occurs.  
Refer to the IMACS-200 Ordering Guide on page vi of the Product Description Chapter for  
information regarding units that contain the Optional OWAN interface.  
13.2 OWAN Port  
13.2.1 OWAN Port Description  
The OWAN port provides two full duplex T1 or E1 compliant DS2 or E2 single-mode optical  
ports for optical serial N times 64 kbps interface capability. Only one of the ports can be active,  
with the other being a redundant link. Each optical port contains a transmit (Tx) and receive  
(Rx) in a single connector along with a status LED. The DS2 or E2 data is extracted from the  
encoded optical signal and demultiplexed into four standard DS1 or E1 signals. Optical  
connection between two IMACS-200 units is achieved using two bi-directional fibers, one  
active and one redundant.  
The IMACS-200 OWAN circuit will terminate four DS1 or E1 signals, and multiplex them  
into a single DS2 or E2 formatted signal. The IMACS-200 supports various alarm detection  
events such as Optical LOS, DS2/E2 OOF, etc. The OWAN port is a 1310 nm single-mode  
fiber transmission path up to 20km using only one fiber for both directions. The second  
OWAN port is a redundant unit, auto-switching when the transmitter fails, or if a LOS event  
occurs. The IMACS-200 will report local as well as remote alarm indications.  
The IMACS-200 employs a CMI (Coded Mark Inversion) encoder and decoder to provide the  
ability to extract a clock from the data stream and to decode and encode DS2 and E2 overhead  
information including T1 remote loopbacks (available in a future release) and protection  
switching data. Currently the IMACS-200 does not support the even bit.  
OWAN Ports  
13-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
On the transmit signal side, the CMI encoded DS2 or E2 signal is fed into a laser driver from  
the CMI encoder. On the receive signal side, the electrical signal is then fed through an digital  
multiplexer to the clock recovery circuit to obtain a clean DS2 or E2 signal and reference  
clock. The analog multiplexer retransmits to the clock recovery circuit either the received  
optical signal or the transmit signal during DS2 or E2 loopback mode. The laser optical output  
power is -10dBm, and the receiver system is capable of recovering the signal to -30dBm.  
The ports shown below in Figure 13-1 show the two ports on the rear of the box, with the dust  
caps removed from OWAN port, ready for optical connectors.  
Figure 13-1.Optional Redundant OWAN Port  
13.2.2 OWAN Alarms  
The OWAN port detects and reports the following alarms:  
LOS (Loss of Signal) An LOS alarm will be declared after 100 microseconds after the  
received optical signal level drops below the operational threshold.  
OOF (Out Of Frame) Activated by the loss of frame synchronization.  
EQ FAIL (Optical Transmitter Alarm) Activated when the Laser Diode current exceeds  
the threshold, or when optical power level is below the minimum threshold.  
CLK REC (Clock Recovery Loss of Signal)  
OPT LOS (Optical Loss of Signal) Raised when the Optical receiver fails to detect a  
signal  
OPT AIS (Optical Alarm Indication Signal) Raised when the Optical unit receives an  
Alarm Indication Signal from the far end.  
13-2  
OWAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
13.2.3 OWAN LED Indications  
The LEDs included below the port connectors for the OWAN are tri-color LEDs. The LED  
can either be off, green, yellow or red. Table 13-1 indicates the color of the LED for the action  
indicated.  
Table 13-1. LED Status Indicators  
Port State  
Active  
Signal Status  
Normal  
Alarm  
LED Color  
Green  
Red  
Active  
RDNT  
Normal  
Alarm  
Yellow  
Red  
RDNT  
STDBY  
Any  
Dark  
13.2.4 OWAN port Cables  
The OWAN port utilizes 1310 nm single-mode optical fiber cables with BFOC12.5 (ST)  
connectors. Each fiber carries both the transmit and receive signal.  
13.3 OWAN port User Screens and Settings  
The OWAN ports permit configuration and operation through use of several user screens and  
optional settings.  
OWAN Ports  
13-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
o.  
Figure 13-2.IMACS-200 Main screen  
The main login screen shows port statuses for the OWAN ports. Two sections are provided,  
separated by a space. The first two status indicators as shown in figure are the Optical transport  
medium status indicators. In the illustration, the first port is active, indicated by the ‘a’ on the  
screen. The second port shows an ‘r’ for this optical ports redundant status. The individual E1  
or T1 ports carried by the optical port are shown grouped together after the space, and in the  
above case all ports are in standby, ‘s’ state.  
13.3.1 OWAN Functional Notes  
Currently the OWAN does not support the SA4 bit in E1 mode. This functionality is planned  
for a future release. In addition, T1 does not currently support loopback generate and detect  
events, and will also be available in a later release. E1 loopback generation and detect are not  
defined, and are not supported. SNMP capability on the OWAN port will be delivered in a later  
release as well, and will be fully functional with Online software 1.3.1 and above. Currently  
the IMACS-200 is supported in Online version 1.3.0.  
13.3.2 OWAN Optical Port Main Screen  
You must configure the OWAN port ports for operation. Configuration can be performed from  
the OWAN port Main Screen, which is shown in Figure 13-3. To access that screen, highlight  
the desired port in the System Main Screen and press <Enter>.  
13-4  
OWAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Figure 13-3.Typical OWAN port Main Screen  
The bottom highlighted line on this screen lists several actions you can perform from the  
screen. To perform an operation, simply press the uppercase letter associated with the desired  
action. For example, to save your option settings, type “s”. Table 13-2 lists the actions you can  
perform.  
13.4 OWAN Port Main Screen Actions  
Table 13-2. OWAN Port Main Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., performance and test data).  
sWitch  
pOrts  
Main  
Switches activity from one port to the other.  
Status and change screens for each WAN port contained in the E2 or DS2.  
Returns to the System Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
STATE  
The state is the only user-editable field at this level. Options are to place the port standby  
(stby), active (actv) or redundant (rdnt).  
OWAN Ports  
13-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
SIG STATUS  
This field reflects that status of the optical link. Possible values indicate loss of signal (los),  
normal (norm)  
SIGTYPE  
This read-only field indicates the type of signaling employed on the optical link. possible  
values are ds2 and e2.  
13.4.1 Port Settings for OWAN  
Figure 13-4 shows the screen displaying the four DS1 or E1 ports and their respective settings.  
Figure 13-4.Typical Settings for the T1 OWAN Ports  
Table 13-3. OWAN Port Setting Options and Defaults for T1  
Parameter  
STATE  
Format  
Line LB  
Local LB  
LB GEN  
LB DET  
User Options  
Default  
stdby  
esf  
off  
off  
off  
off  
stdby actv  
d4 esf  
off on  
off on  
off llb plb  
off on  
w/to  
13-6  
OWAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
STATE  
The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not  
occupy time slots on a WAN link. Set State to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or  
have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use.  
Format  
The format setting determines the type of framing to be used on the individual port, either d4  
or esf.  
Line LB  
The Line Loopback setting controls looping of the full T1 line back to the network. When on,  
this setting allows end-to-end testing of the line.  
LOCAL LB  
The LOCAL Loopback (LOCAL LB) option activates a loopback on the selected port. Choose  
the on setting to loop the outgoing data from the external TPE device back to the TPE receiver.  
This loopback allows you to check the local cabling and most of the optical circuitry in the  
OWAN port. It also disconnects the incoming data from the far end.  
LB GEN  
Currently the loopback generate function has not been implemented. When done, the loopback  
generation field enables the OWAN to generate a loopback request when set to on. Otions that  
will be supported are the plb (payload loopback) and llb (line loopback) when is esf format.  
For d4 format, the values will be loop-up and loop-dn. No loopback and the default are set to  
off.  
LB DET  
Currently the loopback detect function has not been implemented. When done, the loopback  
detect field enables the OWAN to detect a loopback code request when set to on. It also  
provides a with time out w/to option, which will detect and enter into a loopback state, but  
drop the loopback after 10 minutes.  
OWAN Ports  
13-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Figure 13-5.Typical Settings for the E1 OWAN Ports  
Table 13-4. OWAN Port Setting Options and Defaults for E1  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
STATE  
Frame  
TS16  
EVEN BIT  
Line LB  
Local LB  
stdby actv  
crc d-frm  
cas ccs nos  
norm inv  
off on  
stdby  
crc  
cas  
norm  
off  
off  
off on  
STATE  
The State setting determines whether the port is active or inactive. An inactive port does not  
occupy time slots on a WAN link. Set State to standby (stdby) for ports you are not using or  
have not yet configured. Set it to active (actv) for ports that are ready for use.  
Frame  
The frame setting determines the type of framing to be used on the individual port, either crc  
or d-frm.  
13-8  
OWAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TS16  
The TS 16 setting changes the signaling usage of slot 16 for cas (Channel Associated  
Signaling), ccs (Common Channel Signaling) or nos (No Signaling). In the first two options,  
time slot 16 is used to carry signaling information for all channels on the E1. If nos is selected,  
then time slot 16 becomes available for user data.  
EVEN BIT  
Setting the Even Bit parameter for inv will cause the system to invert every even bit in every  
DS0 time slot. This setting should only be used if the entire E1 stream is composed of PCM  
voice, to ensure minimum-ones density.  
LINE LB  
The Line Loopback setting controls looping of the full E1 line back to the network. When on,  
this setting allows end-to-end testing of the line.  
LOCAL LB  
The Loopback setting controls looping of the full E1 line back to the PCM bus. The options  
are off and on. When on, this setting allows testing of local equipment. The system generates  
a "Keep Alive–Type 1" pattern on the E1 line.  
13.5 OPTIC WAN Port Screen Actions  
Table 13-5. OPTIC WAN Port Screen Actions  
Action  
Save  
Function  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Refresh  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., performance and test data).  
Xcon  
Test  
Displays all current cross-connects assigned to the selected port  
Takes the user to the Test screen, as described below.  
Main  
Returns to the System Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and not  
saved, you will be prompted to save or lose changes.  
OWAN Ports  
13-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
13.5.1 Cross-Connect (XCON) Screen  
The Cross-Connect (Xcon) command in the OWAN port screen allows you to view the time  
slot or DS0 assignments that have been set up in the system. Highlight the OWAN on the card  
and press the “x” (Xcon) to select Cross-Connect. Either an E1 screen (Figure 13-6) or a T1  
screen (Figure 13-7) will appear, depending upon the OWAN type selected and highlighted.  
This is a display-only screen.  
Figure 13-6.XCON Screen for E1  
13-10  
OWAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Figure 13-7.XCON Screen for T1  
13.5.2 Test Screen  
Pressing “t” (Test command) in the OWAN Port Screen brings up the screen shown in Figure  
13-8. From this screen, you can create test situations between OWAN interfaces or between a  
single OWAN card and data test equipment at a remote site. Table 13-6 lists the actions you  
can perform from the bottom line of this screen. Table 13-7 lists the settings controlled on this  
screen along with their possible values.  
OWAN Ports  
13-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
Figure 13-8.OWAN Port Test Screen  
Table 13-6. Test Screen Actions  
Function  
Action  
Save  
Saves changes to settings.  
Undo  
Refresh  
Returns all settings to the last saved state.  
Updates certain time-related information fields that are not automatically  
updated (i.e., performance and test data).  
Insert Err Allows you to manually insert a single bit error into the data signal. This does  
not cause a CRC error.  
Clear  
Main  
Clears the Test Screen and resets all counters to zero.  
Returns to the WAN Card Main Screen. If changes are made to settings and  
not saved, you will be prompted to save or abandon those changes.  
Table 13-7. OWAN Port Test Screen Options  
Parameter  
User Options  
Default  
off  
BERT  
SYNC  
BE  
off mark space 1:1 1:7 3:24 qrss prb11 prb15 prb20  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
ES  
information only–no user options  
SES  
CSES  
OSS  
BER  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
13-12  
OWAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ELAP  
LB ST  
information only–no user options  
information only–no user options  
BERT  
The Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) sends a data pattern and measures the bit error rate (BER)  
on the selected WAN port. The patterns that can be selected are off, mark (all ones), space  
(all zeros), 1:1 (0101), 1:7 (0100 0000), 3:24 (this pattern requires 3 bytes to display), qrss  
(quasi-random signal source), prb11 (pseudorandom binary sequence), prb15 and prb20  
SYNC  
The Synchronization (SYNC) field tells you if the integrated BERT has achieved  
synchronization either with itself via a remote loopback or with the remote test equipment.  
Since this is an information only field, there are no user selectable parameters.  
BE  
The Bit Error (BE) field shows the total number of bit errors logged. Since this is an  
information only field, there are no user selectable parameters.  
ES  
The Errored Seconds (ES) field shows the total number of seconds in which any errors were  
detected. Since this is an information only field, there are no user selectable parameters.  
SES  
The Severely Errored Seconds (SES) field shows the total number of seconds in which the bit  
error rate exceeded one bit per thousand (1 x 10-3). Since this is an information only field, there  
are no user selectable parameters.  
CSES  
The Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) field is triggered by the occurrence of ten  
consecutive Severely Errored Seconds. Once triggered, the CSES field will increment (by  
one) for each elapsed second until the system logs ten consecutive non-Severely Errored  
Seconds. Since this is an information only field, there are no user selectable parameters.  
OWAN Ports  
13-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
OSS  
The Out of Synchronization Seconds (OSS) field shows the number of seconds that the WAN  
BERT has been out of synchronization. Since this is an information only field, there are no  
user selectable parameters.  
BER  
The Bit Error Rate (BER) field shows the rate at which errors are being logged. The system  
calculates BER by dividing the number of bit errors (BE) by the total number of bits  
transmitted during the test. Since this is an information only field, there are no user selectable  
parameters.  
ELAP  
The Elapsed time setting shows the running tally of the total number of seconds during the  
test. Since this is an information only field, there are no user selectable parameters.  
LB ST  
The Loopback State setting changes when a WAN unit is both present and operational. This  
includes loopbacks caused by commands from remote devices as well as loopbacks caused by  
local settings. The field will show payld (payload loopback) when the entire signal, excluding  
the framing bit, is looped back. The field will show line (line loopback) when the entire signal  
is looped back towards the network. This field will show local (local loopback) when the  
entire signal is looped back to the ports own transmitter. It will show none if the OWAN port  
is not in loopback.  
13-14  
OWAN Ports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Testing and Diagnostics  
Introduction  
Chapter 14  
System Testing and Diagnostics  
14.1 Introduction  
This chapter describes the IMACS-200 comprehensive set of built-in diagnostic tools that  
enable the operator to remotely troubleshoot and resolve problems. Throughout the user port  
chapters in this system reference guide are brief explanations of system testing and problem  
solving. However this chapter was designed to provide a “full picture” of what this Integrated  
Access System is capable of providing.  
14.2 Integral Test Capabilities  
The Integrated Access System provides diagnostics capabilities to resolve problems. There  
are system-generated alarm messages described in Chapter 4. System Configuration and  
Operation, the integral diagnostics capabilities of this system include Bit Error Rate Testers  
(BERTs) on data ports, tone generators on analog voice ports, the ability to manipulate the  
analog leads and the digital signaling bits of voice circuits.  
The ability to initiate loopbacks at various points in a circuit, coupled with the ability to  
generate and receive test signals and to collect performance and error information, enable the  
operator to systematically troubleshoot circuit problems. It allows the operator to determine if  
the problem resides in the system. Since all of these diagnostic tools can be operated from a  
remote VT100 terminal, troubleshooting begins immediately without dispatching an on-site  
technician.  
Diagnostics  
14-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
System Testing and Diagnostics  
User port Diagnostics  
14.3 User port Diagnostics  
14.3.1 WAN Diagnostics  
Software-initiated diagnostics on T1 WAN aggregates involve looping the WAN signal  
toward the network (line loopback) or the system (local loopback) and placing any one of the  
DS0 channels that make up the WAN signal in local loopback. The table below list detailed  
information on the diagnostic capabilities of the WAN ports.  
Loopbacks  
On-port loopbacks  
T1 Line loopback Toward Network  
T1 Local loopback Toward User  
DS0 Channel loopback Toward Network  
DS0 Channel loopback Toward User  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
In-Band loopback Code Generation  
Industry-Standard T1 Loop-Up Code  
Industry-Standard T1 Loop-Down Code  
N/A  
N/A  
In-Band loopback Code Detection  
Industry-Standard T1 Loop-Up Code  
Industry-Standard T1 Loop-Down Code  
N/A  
N/A  
Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT)  
Patterns Supported  
All 1s  
All 0s  
1:1  
1:7  
511  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
2047  
3:24  
QRSS  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
BERT Direction  
Toward User  
No  
Toward Network  
Yes  
Statistics Gathered by BERT  
Bit Errors (BE)  
Errored Seconds (ES)  
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)  
Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds  
Out of Synchronization Seconds (OOS)  
Bit Error Rate (BER)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Elapsed Seconds (ELAP)  
14-2  
Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Testing and Diagnostics  
14.3.2 Voice Diagnostics  
User port Diagnostics  
The software-initiated diagnostics supported are voice ports include the setting of both analog  
and digital loopbacks toward the network and the generation of Quiet Tone and a Digital  
MilliWatt signal on a port-by-port basis. The operator can also monitor and set the state of the  
analog leads of any FXS or E&M port. They can set and monitor the state of the ABCD  
signaling bits of the digitized voice signal. In cross-connect system, test functionality also  
includes the ability to generate test tones (300Hz, 1 kHz and 3 kHz) and transmit those toward  
the user side or the network side of the system. The table below shows detailed information  
on the diagnostic capabilities of the Voice ports.  
4-wire E&M 2-wire FXS  
On-port loopbacks  
Analog Toward Network  
Digital Toward Network  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Signaling Manipulation  
Set Status of Analog Interface Leads  
Set Transmit ABCD Signaling Bits  
Set Receive ABCD Signaling Bits  
Monitor Status of Analog Interface  
Leads  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes*  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes*  
Yes  
Monitor Status of Transmit ABCD  
Signaling Bits  
Monitor Status of Receive ABCD  
Signaling Bits  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Tone Generation  
Tone Supported  
300 Hz  
1 kHz  
3 kHz  
Quiet Tone  
Digital MilliWatt  
Yes*  
Yes*  
Yes*  
Yes  
Yes*  
Yes*  
Yes*  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Tone Direction  
Toward User  
Toward Network  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Diagnostics  
14-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
System Testing and Diagnostics  
.System with Cross-Connect Option  
14.4 .System with Cross-Connect Option  
14.4.1 Circuit Diagnostics  
In systems equipped with Cross-Connect CPUs, the cross-connect element adds another level  
of testing within the node and enhances the system’s diagnostic capabilities. The operator may  
also monitor and set the state of the Transmit and Receive ABCD signaling bits of a digitized  
voice circuit that is cross-connected between WANs. The table below shows detailed  
information on the diagnostic capabilities of the circuits.  
Single Data  
DS0  
Super-rate  
Data  
Voice  
without  
Signaling  
Voice with  
Signaling  
(64 Kbps) (N x 64 Kbps)  
Loopbacks  
Local loopbacks  
Toward WAN1  
Toward WAN2  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT)  
Patterns Supported  
All 1s  
All 0s  
1:1  
1:7  
M_OOS  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
BERT Direction  
Toward WAN1  
Toward WAN2  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Tones Supported  
300 Hz  
1 kHz  
3 kHz  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Tone Direction  
Toward WAN1  
Toward WAN2  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
14-4  
Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Testing and Diagnostics  
Benefits of Built-In Diagnostics  
Single Data  
DS0  
Super-rate  
Data  
Voice  
without  
Signaling  
Voice with  
Signaling  
(64 Kbps) (N x 64 Kbps)  
Signaling Manipulation  
Toward WAN 1  
Set Transmit ABCD Signaling Bits  
Monitor Status of Transmit ABCD Signaling Bits  
Monitor Status of Receive ABCD Signaling Bits  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Toward WAN 2  
Set Transmit ABCD Signaling Bits  
Monitor Status of Transmit ABCD Signaling Bits  
Monitor Status of Receive ABCD Signaling Bits  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
14.5 Benefits of Built-In Diagnostics  
The real power of the integral diagnostics of the Integrated Access System can be fully  
appreciated when the individual diagnostic tools are applied to everyday troubleshooting such  
as the one illustrated in the following example.  
The environment shown in Figure 14-1 consists of two integrated access devices connected  
by a T1 line. These are referred to as the Local IAD and the Remote IAD respectively. At the  
local IAD, the DTE equipment is a co-located device providing a 56 Kpbs V.35 interface that  
is connected to a V.35 HSU port. At the Remote IAD, an OCU-DP port that interfaces to the  
4-wire DDS tail-circuit extends the 56 Kbps to a third location. Consequently, the Remote  
IAD is equipped with an OCU-DP port that interfaces to the 4-wire DDS tail-circuit. At the  
third location, the DDS circuit terminates in a generic, third-party DSU/CSU which in turn  
provides a 56 Kbps V.35 interface to the remote DTE device.  
The system operator can use the diagnostic tool kit to systematically troubleshoot the problem  
on an end-to-end basis and to identify the faulty sub-system, even if it is external to the  
Integrated Access System. One way to systematically troubleshoot the problem is illustrated  
in Figure 14-1. While there are many other approaches, in general, the procedure to follow is  
to combine loopbacks that are generated either through software commands or via  
industry-standard loop-up codes with Bit Error Rate Tests (BERTs) for data circuits, or test  
tones for voice circuits. In the Integrated Access System, all of those tools are available as  
integral features of the system and of the various ports. Each test determines if a specific  
sub-system is operating properly. In our example, after each test, the sub-systems that are  
shown to be functioning properly are shaded in gray.  
In Figure 14-1, the local HSU port is put in Local loopback and a BERT test is run from the  
DTE. If successful, in Figure 14-1, diagnostics-3 the loopback sequence is advanced by  
putting the T1 link of the Local Integrated Access System in Local loopback and running  
BERT test again. This also tests the cross-connect element of the local Integrated Access  
System if there is one present.  
Diagnostics  
14-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
System Testing and Diagnostics  
Benefits of Built-In Diagnostics  
In Figure 14-1, diagnostics 4, the E1 link of the remote Integrated Access System is  
configured in Line Loopback. Alternatively, a loop up code can be sent from the local  
Integrated Access System to put the E1 link of the remote Integrated Access System in Line  
loopback. This process is repeated until the remote DTE is put in network loopback and tested  
as shown in Figure 14-2, diagnostics 8.  
Figure 14-1.Built-In Diagnostics Example (Diagnostics 1 - 4)  
14-6  
Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Testing and Diagnostics  
Benefits of Built-In Diagnostics  
Figure 14-2.Built-In Diagnostics Example (Diagnostics 5- 9)  
Diagnostics  
14-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
System Testing and Diagnostics  
Benefits of Built-In Diagnostics  
14-8  
Diagnostics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
System Standards and Specifications  
A.1 Introduction  
This appendix lists the Integrated Access System IMACS-200 standards, specifications,  
compliance, power sources and pre-installation settings for the user ports.  
A.2 Standards Compatibility  
The following is a comprehensive list of standards that the System complies to:  
1) Full IEEE 1613 testing on the box, including temperature range (a) as stated in section  
4.1.1.  
(2) Safety:  
United States - UL 60950-1  
Canada - CSA C2.22 No. 60950-1  
European Union - EN 60950-1  
International / CB Scheme - IEC 60950-1 3rd Edition  
(3) EMC:  
United States - FCC Part 15 Class A  
Canada - ICES-03  
European Union/CE Mark - ETSI EN 300 386:2001 which includes:  
EN 55022 Class A  
EN 6100-4-2  
EN 6100-4-3  
EN 6100-4-4  
EN 6100-4-5  
EN 6100-4-6  
EN 6100-3-2 - N/A for DC  
EN 6100-3-3 - N/A for DC  
System Standards and Specifications  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
o.  
A.3 Chassis Standards  
A.3.1 Dimensions  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Weight  
Model  
Chassis Description  
Number  
in  
3.47  
cm  
8.8  
in  
cm  
24.1  
in  
cm  
lb.  
kg  
4.5  
Steel Chassis , Dual-Powered, IMACS-200  
OHSU.  
9.48  
17.31  
44.0  
10.0  
A.3.2 Chassis Power  
Power  
Consumption  
AC Power (50-60 Hz)  
DC Power  
Model  
Chassis Description  
Number  
110 VAC 220 VAC -48 VDC 125 VDC  
Watts  
Steel Chassis , Dual-Powered, IMACS-  
115 VAC  
104 to 135  
VAC  
175 VAC  
to 264  
VAC  
-40 VDC  
to -60  
VDC  
125 (typical)  
500 W  
(maximum)  
OHSU.  
200  
A.3.3 Environment  
A.3.3.1 Ambient Temperature and Humidity  
Ambient temperature and humidity as per IEEE 1613 - 2003 Section 4.1.  
Temperature o C / o F\  
Operate Storage  
Humidity  
Operate  
o
o
o
o
55 to 95% relative  
humidity, non  
condensing  
-40 C to 70 C  
-50 C to 85 C  
o
o
o
o
-40 F to 158 F  
-58 Fto 185 F  
o
o
30 C/hr (54 F/hr)  
Rate of temperature change  
Ambient refers to conditions at a location 30 cm (11.81 inches) from the surface of the unit  
enclosue while in operation.  
A.3.3.2 Airflow  
The IMACS-200 includes two fans. The fans are temperature controlled to automatically turn  
on and off as needed.  
A-2  
System Standards and Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A.3.4 Equipment Handling  
A.3.4.1 Packaged Equipment Shock Criteria  
As per IEEE STD 1613 - 2003 section 10 Table 15. 1000 mm fall.  
A.3.4.2 Unpackaged Equipment Shock Criteria  
As per IEEE STD 1613 - 2003 section 10 Table 15. 100 mm fall.  
A.3.5 Office Vibration and Transportation Vibration  
A.3.5.1 Office Vibration  
As per IEEE STD 1613 - 2003 section 10 Table 14. Severity class V.S.3.  
A.3.5.2 Transportation Vibration  
As per IEEE STD 1613 - 2003 section 10 Table 14. Severity class V.S.4.  
A.3.6 Mounting  
A.3.6.1 Types  
EIA 19” (482 mm) Standard Open Rack or Enclosed Cabinet. WECO 23” Standard Open  
Rack or Enclosed Cabinet. Table Mount or Rack Mount.  
Clearance  
Chassis  
CHAS  
Front  
Back  
Top  
10” (25 cm)  
10” (25 cm)  
2” (5 cm)  
Bottom  
2: (5 cm)  
System Standards and Specifications  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
o.  
A.4 Port Specifications  
A.4.1 WAN port Specifications  
WAN ports  
Physical  
Performance and Test Options  
Loopbacks  
T1  
Line, Local, Loopback Generation and Detection, (ESF only)  
National Bit Supporting (G.704)  
T1 Interface  
Bit Rate and Tolerance  
Number of T1 WAN ports  
Electrical Interface  
Line Coding  
Frame Format  
D4 Framing  
1.544 Mbps + 32 ppm  
4
Per ANSI T1.102/T1.403, DSX-1 1001/2 balanced  
Software selectable AMI or B8ZS  
Software selectable D4 or ESF  
Normal Superframe  
ESF Framing  
Extended Superframe  
Voice Channel Signaling  
AT&T PUB 43801, AT&T 62411, ITU-T Q.421, Q.422 using  
robbed-bit method.  
Error Detection  
Frame Format  
ESF  
Error Scheme  
CRC-6, Controlled Slip, Out of Frame  
BiPolar Violation, Controlled Slip, Out of Frame  
As per Bellcore TR-TSY-000191  
Software Slectable: Adjustable line build out (LBO) settings for 110,  
220, 330, 440, 550, 660 feet and 0dB, 7.5dB, 15dB and 22.5dB  
Complies with ANSI T1.403 and ITU-T G.703  
Complies with ITU-T G.824  
D4  
Alarm Indication  
Line Length  
Power Levels  
Output Jitter  
Input Jitter and Wander  
Complies with ITU-T G.824  
Standards Compatibility  
AT&T  
TR43801  
TR54016  
Digital Channel Bank Requirements and Objectives  
Requirements for Interfacing Digital Terminal Equipment to  
Service Employing the Extended Superframe Format  
Accunet 1.5 Service, Description and Interface Specifications  
TR62411  
Bellcore  
ANSI  
TR-TSY-000191  
T1.101  
T1.107  
T1.403  
T1.408  
Alarm Indication Signal, Requirements and Objectives  
Synchronization Interface Standards for Digital Networks  
Digital Hierarchy - Formats Specifications  
ISDN, Network-to-Customer Installation -DS1 Metallic I/F  
ISDN Primary Rate  
ITU-T  
G.703  
G.704  
Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital I/F  
Synchronous Frame Structure Used At Primary and Secondary  
Hierarchical Levels  
G.824  
The Control of Jitter and Wander Digital which are based on  
the 1544 Kbits/sec Hierarchy.  
Q.421  
Q.422  
Digital line signaling code  
Clauses for exchange line signaling equipment  
A-4  
System Standards and Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A.4.2 FXS port Specifications  
FXS ports IMACS-200-FXS  
Number of Ports  
IMACS-200-FXS  
Physical Interface  
Connector  
4 ports  
1 female 50-pin telco connector  
Exceeds requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.713  
Transmission Performance  
Performance  
Signaling Modes  
Signaling Modes  
Foreign Exchange Station (FXS) Loop Start and Private Line  
Automatic Ringdown (PLAR)  
Termination Impedance  
IMACS-200-FXS  
600 Ohms with 2.16 µF  
VF Transmission Characteristics  
Nominal Transmit TLP  
Nominal Receive TLP  
PCM Encoding  
Defaults to +2.0 dB. Can be set from -6.5 dB to +9.0 dB  
Defaults to -2.0 dB. Can be set from -9.0 dB to +3.0 dB  
Software selectable on a per port basis  
Attenuation Versus Frequency Relative to 1 kHz with 0 dBm0 input  
Frequency  
200 Hz  
300 to 3000 Hz  
3200 Hz  
3400 Hz  
Transmit (A to D)  
-0.25 to +3.0 dB  
-0.25 to +0.5 dB  
0.25 to +0.75 dB  
-0.25 to +1.5 dB  
Receive (D to A)  
-0.25 to +2.0 dB  
-0.25 to +0.5 dB  
-0.25 to +0.75 dB  
-0.25 to +1.5 dB  
Return Loss (at 1 kHz)  
Transhybrid Loss  
Idle Channel Noise (rcv and xmt)  
Interchannel Crosstalk  
>28 dB  
34dB  
< -65 dBm0p Typ < -70 dBmop or < 20 dBrnc0  
Typ < -75 dBm0 using 7 adjacent channels being disturbed with a signal  
of 0.0 dBm0  
Total Distortion including Quantization (Signal to Distortion Ratio) Input Frequencies 1004-1020 Hz  
Input Level  
-30 to 0 dBm0  
-40 dBm0  
-45 dBm0  
Rcv or Xmt  
>35 dB  
>29 dB  
Overall  
>33 dB  
>27 dB  
>22 dB  
>25dB  
Absolute group delay  
Group Delay Distortion vs. frequency  
Longitudinal Balance  
< 750 microseconds  
within boundaries of ITU-T Rec. G.713 Figure 2  
Nom > 46 dB  
Typ > 50 dB  
Variation of Gain with Input Level  
within boundaries of ITU-T Rec. G.713 Figure 7  
System Standards and Specifications  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
A.4.3 E&M port Specifications  
E&M ports 4-Wire  
Physical Interface 4-Wire  
Number of Ports  
Connectors  
4
4 RJ45 telco connector  
Transmission Performance  
Performance  
Exceeds requirements of ITU-T G.712 (4-wire))  
Signaling  
Signaling Types  
Switch selectable - all four ports are the same  
Normal (toward user) and Trunk/Tandem (toward CO)  
Software selectable per port  
Signal Modes  
Transmit Only (to), Type I, II, IV and V.  
VF Transmission Characteristics  
Nominal Transmit TLP  
Software selectable  
-16.5 dB to +7.5 dB in steps of 0.1 dB  
Software selectable  
Nominal Receive TLP  
-16.3 dB to +7.5 dB in steps of 0.1 dB  
with 2.16 µf capacitor in series 600 Ohms  
Software selectable  
Termination Impedance  
PCM Encoding  
µ-law  
A-law  
Attenuation Versus Frequency as per AT&T TR43801 - Relative to 1 kHz with 0 dBm0 input  
Frequency  
200 Hz  
300 to 3000 Hz  
3200 Hz  
Transmit (A to D)  
-0.25 to +3.0 dB  
-0.25 to +0.5 dB  
0.25 to +0.75 dB  
-0.25 to +1.5 dB  
Receive (D to A)  
-0.25 to +2.0 dB  
-0.25 to +0.5 dB  
-0.25 to +0.75 dB  
-0.25 to +1.5 dB  
3400 Hz  
Return Loss  
Against 600 Ohms, in series with 2.6 µf with additional 25 Ohms  
resistor between the channel unit and the return loss measurement set.  
1kHz 28dB min.  
4-wire  
300 to 3000 Hz 23dB min.  
4W Return Loss (at 1 kHz)  
Relative Transhybrid Loss  
Idle Channel Noise (rcv and xmt)  
Interchannel Crosstalk  
>20dB Typ > 27dB  
Against 600 Ohms, in series with 2.16 µf termination.  
< -65Bm0p. Typically < -70 dBm0p or < 20 dBrnc0 <20dBBrnc0  
Typ < -75 dBm0 using 7 adjacent channels being distributed with a  
signal of 0.0 dBm0.  
Total Distortion including Quantization (Signal to Distortion Ratio) Input Frequencies 1004-1020 Hz  
Input Level  
-30 to 0 dBm0  
-40 dBm0  
-45 dBm0  
Rcv or Xmt  
>35 dB  
>20 dB  
Overall  
>33.9 dB  
>27.6 dB  
>23 dB  
>25dB  
Absolute group delay  
Group Delay Distortion vs. frequency  
Longitudinal Balance  
Variation of Gain with Input Level  
< 600 microseconds  
within boundaries of ITU-T Rec. G.712 Figure 2  
>46 dB Typ > 50 dB  
within boundaries of ITU-T Rec. G.713 Figure 7 (2 wire)  
within boundaries of ITU-T Rec. G.712 Figure 7 (4 wire)  
Typical gain variation is within + 0.25 dB from +3 to -50 dBm0  
Diagnostic Capabilities  
A-6  
System Standards and Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics  
Analog loopback  
Digital loopback  
“Make Busy” signaling control  
Standards Compatibility  
Bell System  
ITU-T  
TR43801  
Recommendations G.711, G.712 and G.714  
System Standards and Specifications  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
A.4.4 SRU port Specifications  
SRU Ports  
Number of Ports  
5
Physical Interface  
female 8-pin RJ-48  
Electrical Interface  
Operational Interface  
Interface Settings  
Sub-rate Framing Format  
Sub-rate Time slot Number  
RS232C, ITU-T V.28  
DCE - Full Duplex  
Asynchronous, Synchronous  
DS0-A, DS0-B with 5 divisions per DS0  
1 through 5 depending on Sub-rate Framing Format  
Synchronous Data  
Format  
Transparent  
Transmit Clocking  
Speeds  
Software selectable per port; internal or external  
2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 28.8 and 38.4 kbps  
Asynchronous Data  
Format  
Stop Bits  
Data Bits  
Parity  
Proprietary  
Software selectable per port; 1 or 2  
Software selectable per port; 5, 6, 7 or 8  
Software selectable per port; none, odd, even, space or mark  
.3, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8 and 38.4 kbps  
Speeds  
Signaling  
DSR  
Tied to DTR  
CTS  
CTS delay  
RLSD  
Software selectable per port; on, off (tied to RTS)  
Software selectable per port; immediate, 30, 60 or 100 ms  
Software selectable per port; permanently on, follows remote RTS (drop on receipt  
of IDLE or CGA RED)  
Diagnostics & Alarms  
BERT  
Integral  
Direction  
Data Patterns  
Toward DTE or toward Network  
Off, mark, space, 1:1, 1:7, 511, 2047 zeros  
Loopbacks  
Local  
Toward DTE or toward Network  
Standards Compatibility  
AT&T  
TR 54075  
V.28  
Subrate Data Multiplexing - A Service of DATAPHONE  
Digital Service  
Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current  
interchange circuits  
ITU-T  
X.50 Division 3  
Fundamental Parameters of a Multiplexing Scheme for the  
International Interface Between Synchronous Data Networks  
(note: does not support 600 bps data)  
V.14  
Transmission of Start-Stop Characters over Synchronous  
Bearer Channels (using async to sync converters)  
Interface Between DTE and DCE Employing Serial Binary  
Data Interchange  
EIA  
RS 232  
A-8  
System Standards and Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A.4.5 HSU Port Specifications  
Number of  
Data Ports  
Physical Interfaces  
2 female 25-pin DB25 D-connectors  
Electrical Interfaces  
ITU-T V.35  
2
Data Speeds  
N x 56k and N x 64k, where N = 1 to 24 (up to 1536 kbps) - Software Configurable by  
DS0  
Data Format  
Data Protocol  
Synchronous  
Transparent  
Transmit Clock per Port Internal or External (software selectable)  
Clock Polarity per Port  
Data Polarity per Port  
Normal or inverted (software selectable)  
Normal or inverted (software selectable)  
Diagnostics  
RTS/CTS Delay: per  
Port  
0, 30, 60 or 100 ms (software selectable by port)  
RTS Handshake per  
Port  
Permanent, local, ignore, local (software selectable by port)  
BER Test per Port  
Active or inactive  
BER Test Patterns All Marks, All Spaces, 1:1, 1:7, QRSS, 511, 2047  
None, towards DTE, towards the network  
Local Loopback per  
Port  
Performance Statistics  
Errored Seconds, Unavailable Second, Severely Errored Second, Burst Errored Second, Loss of  
Packet Seconds, Loss of Frame Count  
Standards Compatibility  
ITU-T  
V.35  
Data Transmission of 48 kbps using 60-108 kHz Group Bank  
Circuits.  
V.11 (10/96)  
V. 28  
Electrical characteristics for balanced double-current interchange  
circuits operating at data signaling rates up to 10 Mbit/s.  
Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current  
interchange circuits.  
EIA  
Recommendations  
RS-530  
High Speed 25 Position Interface for Data Terminal Equipment,  
Including Alternative 25 Position Connector.  
System Standards and Specifications  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
A.4.6 OHSU port Specifications  
Number of  
Data Ports  
Physical Interfaces  
4 ST connectors  
Optical Interfaces  
IEEE C37.94  
2
Data Speeds  
N x 64k, where N = 1 to 12 - Software Configurable  
Data Format  
Data Protocol  
Synchronous  
Transparent  
Transmit Clock per Port Internal  
Standards Compatibility  
IEEE C37.94  
A-10  
System Standards and Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPR Server Specifications  
1.5 IPR Server Specifications  
IPR  
Input/Output  
2 maximum (1 10-BaseT Ethernet, 1Frame Relay Wide-Area Network)  
LAN Traffic I/O  
Frame Relay Traffic I/O  
Frame Relay Port Types  
MTU  
10BaseT  
T1, E1,  
UNI DCE, UNI DTE, NNI  
1500 bytes  
No. of PVCs  
25  
Routing Table  
ARP Table  
100 entries (up to 20 static entries)  
100 entries (LRU)  
Management  
RFC 1315 DTE MIB, Frame Relay Service MIB, SNMP Alarm Traps  
per RFC 1215  
Connectivity  
SNMP or TELNET  
LMI Options  
Q.933 Annex A, ANSI T1.617 Annex D, LMI (Gang of 4), None  
CIR = 0 to 2048 Kb/s, Bc = 0 to 2048 Kb, Be = 0 to 2048 Kb  
N392, T392, N393 all configurable  
N392, T391, N393, N391 all configurable  
Point-to-point.  
Information Rates  
DCE Parameters  
DTE Parameters  
IP Subnet Topologies  
System Standards and Specifications  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
IPR Server Specifications  
A-12  
System Standards and Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Error Messages  
B.1 Introduction  
This appendix lists the IMACS-200 error messages. One of these messages may appear at the  
bottom of the screen when you enter a command, indicating that the system did not perform  
the requested action. This condition may have been caused by an operator error, absence of a  
port in the system, or other condition. If an error message appears, take the appropriate  
corrective action. For convenience, the system error messages are listed alphabetically.  
A name must be assigned to Circuit ID field.  
You must enter a name for the circuit before attempting this operation. Go to the Circuit ID  
field, type the desired name, and save it.  
All blank prt report.  
You chose the empty option setting for all four elements of the Print Alarm on the Interface  
port. This combination of settings is invalid and cannot be saved. Choose the proper option  
settings for these elements.  
ASYNC/5 databits must have 2 stop or parity.  
You have assigned an SRU port to an asynchronous circuit with 5 data bits, one stop bit, and  
no parity. This is an invalid combination of option settings. Either choose two (2) stop bits, or  
enable parity on that port.  
Both WAN’s cannot be in test mode.  
You cannot use the test option on both sides of a cross-connect simultaneously.  
Cannot be STDBY while BERT test is running.  
You cannot change a port from the actv (active) state to the stdby (standby) state while the Bit  
Error Rate Tester (BERT) is running. You must end the BERT test first.  
Error Messages  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
o.  
Cannot define any more XCON circuits.  
The maximum number of cross-connect circuits is 99.  
Can NOT delete circuit while test is active.  
You must end the test in progress before deleting the circuit.  
Cannot do it in Viewer mode.  
You are logged in under the Viewer password, but that level of access does not allow you to  
perform the desired operation. Log out of the system, log back in under the Operator or  
Manager password, and repeat the command. Or, perform an operation that is permitted by the  
Viewer access level.  
Cannot have REMOTE and LOCAL loopbacks.  
You cannot place the port in both a local loopback and a remote loopback simultaneously.  
Cannot insert errors without BERT running.  
You must start BERT testing before inserting bit errors.  
Cannot switch non-compatible WANs.  
The current WAN port arrangement does not support redundant WAN switching.  
Cannot switch to a non-operational WAN.  
You cannot switch to the selected WAN port because it is out of service.  
Cannot use the same TS on different WAN.  
You cannot assign an SRU port to the same time slot on different WAN ports.  
Card is not available.  
You cannot test the port because it is faulty.  
B-2  
Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Channel test is available from WAN XCON screen.  
To test a cross-connected voice circuit, go to the Cross-Connect Screen.  
Circuit name must be entered.  
You must enter a name for the cross-connect circuit before attempting this command.  
Config. changes must be made from primary WAN.  
You cannot make configuration changes to a redundant WAN port. This is allowed only on  
primary WAN ports.  
Duplicate prt report element.  
You have asked the Print Alarms option to print the same element twice.  
Empty field is not allowed.  
You cannot assign a blank password on the CPU port Main Screen. Always enter  
alphanumeric characters.  
ENETBRI/PRI port is not installed or config.  
An Ethernet BRI/PRI port is not present in the system, and is not configured.  
ERROR found in the RESTORE file.  
The system restore failed due to a software error. Repeat the restore, and call Technical  
Support if this message reappears.  
Field can NOT be MODIFIED.  
You cannot edit this field.  
Group already taken.  
This group is already assigned.  
Error Messages  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Illegal address and mask combination.  
The combination of IP address and mask numbers you chose is invalid. Change either the IP  
address or mask number.  
Illegal IP Mask.  
The IP netmask number you chose is invalid.  
Invalid character in Node Id.  
The only valid characters for a Node ID are alphanumeric characters and the underscore.  
Invalid date/time format.  
You have entered an invalid date or time.  
Invalid endpoint name.  
The endpoint name you chose is invalid.  
Invalid IP address.  
The IP address you chose is invalid.  
Invalid IP netmask.  
The IP netmask you chose is invalid.  
Invalid password for this command.  
You cannot use the debug command from the System Test and Debug Screen without the  
proper password authorization.  
Invalid secondary clock format.  
You cannot assign an external clock source as the secondary system clock.  
B-4  
Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Invalid Timeslot.  
When assigning time slots to user voice and data ports, you must choose time slot number 1  
to 24 for a WAN T1 port.  
Invalid user name.  
User name must be a combination of alpha-numeric characters. Control characters, spaces,  
and special characters are not allowed.  
Invalid WAN/SRVR.  
You cannot assign services to an unavailable WAN or Server port.  
IP Address must be unique.  
The IP address is already assigned.  
Local LB & Test Pattern can’t be ON together.  
You cannot perform a loopback with a test pattern applied, and you cannot apply a test pattern  
if a loopback is active.  
Modification can’t be saved while test is active.  
You cannot make changes in this screen while a test is in progress.  
Must have OOS status.  
You cannot delete a port that has not been removed from the system. Remove the port first.  
No changes while BERT is running.  
You cannot change the port configuration while Bit Error Rate Testing is active. Turn the test  
mode off before making your changes.  
No historical alarms.  
You have selected the History command in the Alarm Screen, but no alarms exist in that log.  
Error Messages  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
No more than two WANs in BERT test are allowed.  
You can place only two WAN ports in the BERT test mode simultaneously.  
No timeslot(s) specified.  
You cannot activate a user port that doesn’t have any WAN time slots assigned to it.  
Not implemented yet.  
You cannot use a feature or function that is not yet released. This message normally appears  
on software versions for beta testing.  
Not supported.  
This command is currently not supported by the system.  
Number of TS from must be equal to TS to.  
You cannot assign a time slot cross-connection with an unequal number of “from” (source)  
and “to” (destination) time slots.  
OK to lose changes (y/n)?  
Confirm Yes or No if losing the changes entered is OK with you.  
Only one port can be at 128K.  
You cannot configure more than one port of the port for 128 kbps.  
Parameters are not saved.  
You have selected the Main command from the bottom of the screen without first saving your  
changes. Press “s” to invoke the Save command first.  
Parameters have been saved.  
You have made changes to the port and typed “s” to invoke the Save command. (This is a  
normal message, it always appears when you type “s” to save changes.)  
B-6  
Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Password minimum is 6. Use letters AND numbers  
Passwords must be at least six characters long and contain both letters and numbers. A  
minimum of one number must be used.  
Password mismatch.  
The password verification box did not match the original box.  
Performance statistics not available.  
You cannot obtain performance statistics for this port or ports.  
Port already configured for Remote Terminal.  
This port is already configured for use with a remote terminal.  
Port is in use.  
You cannot make any changes to an active port.  
Port is not configured for ASCII.  
This port is not configured for ASCII operation.  
Port is not configured for TCP/IP.  
This port is not configured for TCP/IP operation.  
Primary WAN is not operational.  
You cannot switch from a redundant WAN port back to a primary WAN port if the primary  
port is still not operational.  
RATE = 19.2 must have DATA = 8.  
If you set the SRU port rate to 19.2 kbps, you also must set the number of data bits for that  
port to 8.  
Error Messages  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Redundancy switchover is complete.  
You have asked the system to switch to the redundant WAN port, and the switchover was  
successfully completed. (This is not an error message; it normally appears after you initiate  
the switchover.)  
Redundant WAN is taken already.  
You cannot switch to the redundant WAN port in slot WAN-4 if it is already in use from a  
previous WAN port switch.  
Remote session active. Can’t change setting.  
You cannot change this setting because a remote operator has accessed the system and is  
controlling it. Wait for that operator to log off and disconnect.  
Restricted field.  
You cannot access the Superuser password field on the CPU port Main Screen. This password  
is factory-assigned.  
Selected circuit is under the test already.  
The current circuit is already being tested.  
Simultaneous loopback tests not allowed.  
You cannot activate two or more loopbacks at the same time.  
SNMP Options not available on this CPU.  
The current CPU port does not support SNMP configuration.  
SR TS overlapping.  
The subrate circuit assigned does not allow enough space for a previously assigned circuit on  
the same subrate time slot. For example, if you have a 19.2 kbps device on subrate time slot 1  
in b-5 framing, you cannot assign another 19.2 kbps circuit to subrate time slot 2, because the  
circuit on 1 actually occupies subrate time slots 1 and 2. You must therefore assign that other  
circuit to subrate time slot 3 or 4.  
B-8  
Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switch request sent to port.  
The system has sent your redundancy switchover command to the associated port.  
Switchover must be made from the primary WAN.  
You cannot switch to a redundant WAN port from another redundant WAN port. You can only  
switch from a primary port to a redundant port.  
Test function is not available.  
The selected test is not available on the current port.  
Test in progress. No changes from this screen.  
You cannot change any settings in this screen while a port test is in progress.  
TS Connection must be specified.  
You must specify a time slot connection for the WAN circuit.  
Voice CPU is not responding.  
The voice CPU is not working. Power down the system, then power it up again.  
WAN must be active (no loopback) to run BERT test.  
You must turn off all WAN loopbacks before starting a BERT test on a WAN port.  
Xconnect table can be accessed from primary WAN.  
You cannot access the WAN cross-connect information from a redundant WAN port. Do this  
from a primary WAN port instead.  
Error Messages  
B-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
B-10  
Error Messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
This Appendix lists the glossary of terms used in the telecommunications industry today.  
AAL  
ATM Adaption Layer  
ABCD bits  
The bits that carry signaling information over a T1 or E1 line.  
ABR  
Available Bit Rate  
ACAMI  
Alternate Channel AMI, transmitting data on every other DS0 in a DS1 to ensure ones-density.  
ACO  
Alarm Cutoff  
ACS  
Advanced Communications Server  
ADPCM  
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation  
ADPCM port  
A resource port used to compress voice or subrate data on a DS0.  
ADSL  
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line  
aggregate  
A single bitstream combining many bitstreams of lower rates.  
Glossary  
-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
o.  
AIS  
Alarm Indication Signal  
AIS/ALM  
Alarm Indication Signal/Alarm  
AIM  
ATM Inverse Multiplexer  
a-law  
E1 companding standard used in the conversion between analog and digital signals in PCM  
ALIS  
Analogue Line Interface Solution systems.  
AMI  
Alternate Mark Inversion, a line coding format for T1 lines.  
ANI  
Automatic Number Identification  
ANSI  
American National Standards Institute  
ASCII  
American Standard Code for Information Interchange  
ASK  
Amplitude Shift Keying  
ATM  
Asynchronous Transfer Mode  
AWG  
American Wire Gauge (the size of an electrical wire)  
-2  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B7R  
Bit #7 Redundant  
B7R port  
A network port used to provide Network Management capability for the system.  
B8ZS  
Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution, a coding scheme that maintains minimum-ones density on a T1  
line.  
Baud Rate  
A measure of transmission speed over an analog phone line  
B-channel  
In ISDN, a full-duplex, 64 kbps (“bearer”) channel that carries user data.  
BECN  
Backward Explicit Congestion Notification  
BER  
Bit Error Rate, the number of errored bits divided by the total number of bits.  
BERT  
Bit Error Rate Tester  
BES  
A Bursty Errored Second is any second with more than one and fewer than 320 CRC-6 (ESF),  
BPV (D4/D-frame), or CRC-4 (E1) errors  
bit  
Contraction of the words "binary" and "digit."  
bps  
Bits per second (not to be confused with Baud Rate)  
BRI  
Basic Rate Interface, (2B+D) in ISDN  
Glossary  
-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
BRITE  
BRI Terminal Emulation  
CAS  
Channel-Associated Signaling, a means of conveying voice-circuit signaling over an E1 line.  
CAS–CC  
Channel Associated Signaling–Common Channel  
CAS–BR  
Channel Associated Signaling–Bit-robbing mode, used to convey voice-circuit signaling over  
a T1 line.  
CBR  
Constant Bit Rate  
CCITT  
Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone, now known as the ITU  
(International Telecommunications Union).  
CCR  
Current Cell Rate  
CCS  
Common Channel Signaling  
CEP  
Connection End Point  
CEPT  
Conference on European Posts and Telecommunications, a European standards organization.  
CES  
Circuit Emulation Service  
-4  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CGA  
Carrier Group Alarm, a condition that results from a network failure. Forces all voice circuits  
off-hook or on-hook until the alarm-causing condition is cleared and the CGA ends.  
CLUE  
Customer-Located Equipment  
clear channel  
A DS0 channel without formatting restrictions (i.e., uses the full 64 kbps bandwidth for data  
transmission).  
CO  
Central Office  
channel bank  
A device that places multiple voice and/or data channels onto a digital or analog carrier  
CL  
Connectionless Service  
CPE  
Customer Premises Equipment  
CODEC  
COder/DECoder (a device that encodes and decodes signals)  
companding  
Non-linear reduction of a signal, usually compressing the larger signal values  
CRC  
Cyclic Redundancy Check  
CRC-4  
CRC using four check bits  
CRC-6  
CRC using six check bits  
Glossary  
-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
CSA  
Carrier Serving Area  
CSC  
Common Signaling Channel  
CSU  
Channel Service Unit, an interface to a T1 line that terminates the local loop.  
CTE  
Channel Terminating Equipment (Network)  
CTS  
Clear To Send, a lead on an interface indicating that the DCE is ready to receive data.  
D4  
A common T1 framing format, consisting of 12 frames. Also known as SF framing.  
DACS  
Digital Access and Cross-connect System (an electronic digital test access and patching  
system)  
DCC  
Data Communication Channel  
DCE  
Data Communications Equipment  
DCS  
Digital Cross-connect System  
D-channel  
Full-duplex, 16 kbps BRI channel or 64 kbps PRI ISDN channel.  
DDS  
Digital Data Service  
-6  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d/i  
Drop and Insert, one of the modes of operation for the WAN port.  
DID  
Direct Inward Dialing  
DLC  
Digital Loop Carrier  
DLCI  
Data Link Connection Identifier  
DM  
Degraded Minutes. Number of minutes with ES, UAS or LOS greater than zero (0).  
DMA  
Direct Memory Access  
DPO  
Dial-Pulse Originating  
DPT  
Dial-Pulse Terminating  
DRAM  
Dynamic Random Access Memory  
DS0  
Digital Signal - Zero, the standard bandwidth for digitized voice channels. Also referred to as  
a time slot.  
DS0–A  
Strategy for mapping a single low-speed data circuit to a single DS0.  
DS0–B  
Strategy for multiplexing two or more DS0-A low-speed data circuits onto a single DS0 (e.g.,  
5x9.6kbps, 10x4.8kbps or 20x2.4kbps).  
Glossary  
-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
DS1  
Digital Signal, Level 1  
DSL  
Digital Subscriber Line  
DSR  
Data Set Ready  
DSX  
Digital Signal Cross-connect  
DTE  
Data Terminal Equipment  
DTR  
Data Terminal Ready  
DX  
Duplex Signaling  
E1  
Digital 2.048 Mbps line rate, widely used in countries outside the U.S. and Canada.  
EFCI  
Explicit Forward Congestion Indicator  
ELAN  
Emulated Local Area Network  
EPROM  
Electronic Programmable Read-Only Memory, stores firmware on plug-in modules of the  
system.  
ES  
-8  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Errored Seconds. The number of seconds for which BRI port has detected a NEBE or FEBE  
greater than zero (0).  
ESF  
Extended Superframe (24-frame sequence for a T1 line; consists of two superframes)  
ESS  
Electronic Switching System  
E&M  
Earth and Magnetic, or recEive and transMit. The signaling leads on inter-switch voice  
connections.  
E&M port  
An E&M voice port for this system.  
ETS1  
European Telecommunications Standards Institute  
F4  
Four-frame multiframe structure used in T1 signals.  
FAS  
Frame Alignment Signal  
FCC  
Federal Communications Commission  
FDL  
Facility Data Link, consists of every other framing bit of an extended T1 superframe. The FDL  
is used to convey performance data, line test/loopback status, and other parameters for an  
ESF-framed T1 line. The FDL rate is 4 kHz.  
FE1  
Fractional E1  
FEBE  
Glossary  
-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Far End Block Error, shows transmission errors detected by the far end equipment  
FOTS  
Fiber Optics Transmission Systems  
frame  
A delineated assembly of information, consisting of one sequence of 24 encoded channel  
samples (T1) or 32 channel samples (E1).  
FS  
Frame Signaling bits (T1 line).  
FT  
Frame Terminal bits (T1 line)  
FT1  
Fractional T1  
FUNI  
Frame User Network Interface  
FX  
Foreign Exchange, a line that goes from a CO or PBX beyond the PBX or the CO’s normal  
service area.  
FXO  
Foreign Exchange - Office, performs analog to digital and digital to analog transmission at the  
CO.  
FXS  
Foreign Exchange - Subscriber or Station, an interface at the end of an FX line connected to a  
telephone or PBX. Performs digital to analog and analog to digital transmission at the station  
end.  
FXS port  
One of the voice ports for this system  
Ground  
-10  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A physical connection to the earth, chassis, or other reference point  
HDB3  
High-Density Bipolar Order of 3, three-zero maximum coding for E1 lines. Provides a fourth  
zero violation for data bytes.  
HDLC  
High-Level Data Link Control (bit-oriented protocol)  
HDSL  
High-bit rate Digital Subscriber Line  
HSU port  
High-Speed Unit port (one of the data ports for this system).  
HMI  
Host Management Interface  
HOM  
HDSL OEM Module  
ICMP  
Internet Control Message Protocol  
IEC  
Inter-exchange Carrier (also called IXC)  
IMUX  
Inverse Multiplexer  
IMUX port  
A resource port that gives users access to the ISDN network for bandwidth-on-demand  
applications.  
inverted a-law  
A variation of a-law encoding that provides a higher ones density on E1 lines.  
IP  
Glossary  
-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Internet Protocol  
IPR  
Internet Protocol Router  
ISP  
Internet Service Provider  
ITU  
International Telecommunications Union (previously known as CCITT [Consultative  
Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone])  
ITU-T  
International Telecommunications Union, Technical sector  
IXC  
Inter-exchange Carrier (also called IEC)  
Kbps  
Kilobits per second  
LAN  
Local Area Network  
LANE  
LAN Emulation  
loopback  
Path for returning a signal back to the point of origin for circuit testing  
LOS  
Loss Of Synchronization. Shows the number of seconds for which the BRI port detects LOS.  
LSB  
Least Significant Bit  
LT  
-12  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Termination  
LULT  
LT Like Unit  
LUNT  
NT Like Unit  
MAC  
Media Access Control  
MBS  
Nortel’s Meridian Business Set. An electronic telephone set capable of handling the Meridian  
Digital Centrex features offered by DMS SuperNode Switch.  
Mbps  
Megabits per second  
MDC  
Meridian Digital Centrex  
modem  
Contraction of the words “modulator” and “demodulator”  
MRD  
Manual Ringdown  
MSP  
Maintenance Service Provider  
MTS  
Memory Time Switch  
MTU  
Maximum Transfer Unit  
mu-law  
Glossary  
-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
T1 companding standard used in the conversion between analog and digital signals in PCM  
systems.  
NEBE  
Near End Block Error. Shows transmission errors detected by the near end equipment  
Network port  
A CPU port, Resource port, or WAN port used in this system.  
NMS  
Network management system, a computer used to control networks from a single location.  
NNI  
Network Node Interface  
NOS  
No-Signal Alarm  
NRZ  
Non-Return-to-Zero signal format  
NT  
Network Termination  
NTU  
Network Termination Unit, connects BRI station equipment to the integrated access system.  
Any standard 2B1Q (U interface) device that supports "nailed-up" (one or two B-channels)  
connections with no D-channel signaling.  
OCU–DP port  
Office Channel Unit - Dataport (one of the data ports for this system).  
OOF  
Out Of Frame, an indication that the system is searching for the framing bit pattern in the  
signal received from the network.  
OOS  
-14  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Out of Service, an indication that a system element has failed.  
OSI  
Open Systems Interconnection  
PAM  
Pulse Amplitude Modulation  
PBX  
Private Branch Exchange, a small phone switch inside a company.  
PCM  
Pulse Code Modulation  
PDU  
Protocol Data Unit  
ping  
A program used to test IP-level connectivity from one IP address to another.  
PLAR  
Private Line Automatic Ringdown  
PLR  
Pulse Link Repeater  
POP  
Point of Presence, usually a telephone carrier office.  
POTS  
Plain Old Telephone Service  
PPO  
PPhone Foreign Exchange Office port. An interface at the end of the FX line connected to  
DMS SuperNode Switch.  
PPP  
Glossary  
-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Point-to-Point Protocol  
PPS  
PPhone Foreign Exchange Station port. An interface at the end of the FX line connected to  
MBS.  
protocol  
Procedure or set of rules for communication between two devices.  
PSTN  
Public Switched Telephone Network.  
PTT  
Postal, Telephone, and Telegraph authority  
PVC  
Permanent Virtual Circuit  
QAM  
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation  
RAI  
Remote Alarm Indication  
Red alarm  
A local alarm on a T1 line, indicating that a major failure has occurred at this location.  
robbed-bit  
A type of analog signaling that occasionally “robs” information bits to convey encoded  
voice-circuit signaling.  
RZ  
Return-to-Zero signal format  
SAP  
Service Access Point  
-16  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SES  
Severely Errored Seconds  
SF  
Superframe, a T1 framing format consisting of 12 frames. Also known as D4 framing.  
SLC Subscriber Loop Carrier, a Digital Loop Carrier (DLC).  
SLIP  
Serial Line Internet Protocol  
SMDS  
Switched Multi-megabit Data Service  
SNMP  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
SONET  
Synchronous Optical Network  
SRU port  
Subrate Unit port (one of the data ports for this system).  
system  
Often used as a synonym for the integrated access system.  
TA  
Terminal Adapter  
TE  
Terminal Equipment  
T1  
The North American DS1 transmission rate, 1.544 Mbps.  
TAD  
Test Access Digroup  
Glossary  
-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
TCP/IP  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol  
TDM  
Time-Division Multiplexing  
TELNET  
An application protocol offering virtual terminal service in the Internet suite of protocols.  
time slot map  
Specification of the connections between all incoming and outgoing lines connected to the  
system. A cross-connect map allows users to split the bandwidth of T1 and E1 lines into  
amounts more suitable for normal voice and data communications.  
TS  
Time Slot  
TSA  
Time Slot Assigner  
UART  
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter  
UAS  
Unavailable Seconds. Incremented by 10 when LOS has remained for more than 10  
consecutive seconds and incremented by 1 every second until LOS is removed.  
UDP  
User Datagram Protocol  
UI  
Unit Interval  
UNI  
User Network Interface  
-18  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User port  
A Voice port, Data port, or Alarm port.  
VBR  
Variable Bit Rate  
VC  
Virtual Channel  
VCL  
Virtual Channel Link  
VP  
Virtual Path  
VPC  
Virtual Path Connection  
WAN  
Wide Area Network  
WAN port  
Wide Area Network port (one of the ports for this system).  
wideband  
A bandwidth equal to many individual channels  
X.50  
CCITT (ITU) standard data transmission protocol.  
yellow alarm  
Remote alarm on a T1 line. A major failure has occurred at a remote location.  
ZCS  
Glossary  
-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o.  
Zero Code Suppression  
-20  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Western Digital Computer Drive SATA 600 User Manual
Westinghouse Landscape Lighting W 125 User Manual
Westinghouse Microwave Oven WCM990B User Manual
Westinghouse Model Vehicle VR 3236 User Manual
White Rodgers Thermostat 50a55 286 User Manual
Wilton Sander Belt And Disc Sander User Manual
Wolf Appliance Company Range DF484CG User Manual
Zanussi Oven ZOU 481 User Manual
Zanussi Refrigerator Z16 12R User Manual
Zanussi Refrigerator ZX 56 4 W User Manual